LG Electronics Flat Panel Television 19 22 26 32LD3 User Manual

OWNER’S MANUAL  
LCD TV / LED LCD TV  
Please read this manual carefully before operating  
your set and retain it for future reference.  
www.lg.com  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CONTENTS  
Initializing(Reset to original factory settings) ....51  
PREPARATION  
LCD TV Models : 19/22/26/32LD35  
**,  
19/22/26/32LD34  
**..........................................A-1  
LCD TV Models : 32/37/42/47LD4 , 26/32LD32  
***  
**  
26/32LD33  
**...........................................................A-14  
LCD TV Models : 32/42/46/52/60LD5  
LED LCD TV Models : 19/22/26/32LE3 , 32/37/  
***  
*** ......A-24  
TO USE A USB DEVICE  
Deactivation .....................................................85  
Supported Display Resolution...........................12  
GUIDE)(IN DIGITAL MODE)  
Button Function in Schedule List Mode............91  
WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CON-  
Diagnostics........................................................38  
I
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CONTENTS  
-
II  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PREPARATION  
LCD TV MODELS : 19/22/26/32LD35 , 19/22/26/32LD34  
**  
**  
ACCESSORIES  
Ensure that the following accessories are included with your TV. If an accessory is missing, please  
contact the dealer where you purchased the TV.  
Image shown may differ from your TV.  
This item is not included for all models.  
* Lightly wipe any stains or  
fingerprints on the surface  
of the TV with the polish-  
ing cloth.  
Remote Control  
Owner’s Manual  
Ferrite Core  
Batteries  
(AAA)  
Polishing Cloth  
Polishing cloth for  
use on the screen.  
Do not use excessive  
force. This may cause  
scratching or discoloura-  
tion.  
(
This item is not included  
Power Cord  
for all models.  
)
Only 19/22LD35 , 19/22LD34  
**  
**  
Cable Holder  
Protection Cover  
Only 26/32LD35 , 26/32LD34  
**  
**  
x 8  
(M4x20)  
Bolts for stand assembly 1-screw for stand fixing  
Protection Cover  
Use of ferrite core (This feature is not available for all models.)  
Ferrite core can be used to reduce the electromagnetic  
wave when connecting the power cord.  
The closer the location of the ferrite core to the power  
plug, the better it is.  
Install the power plug closely.  
A-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PREPARATION  
FRONT PANEL CONTROLS  
NOTE  
TV can be placed in standby mode in order to reduce the power consumption. And TV should be  
switched off using the power switch on the TV if it will not be watched for some time, as this will  
reduce energy consumption.  
The energy consumed during use can be significantly reduced if the level of brightness of the  
picture is reduced, and this will reduce the overall running cost.  
CAUTION  
Do not step on the glass stand or subject it to any impact. It may break, causing possible injury  
from fragments of glass, or the TV may fall.  
Do not drag the TV. The floor or the product may be damaged.  
Image shown may differ from your TV.  
Only 19/22LD35 , 19/22LD34  
**  
**  
VOLUME  
POWER  
MENU  
Only 26/32LD35 ,  
**  
PROGRAMME  
INPUT  
OK  
26/32LD34  
**  
PROGRAMME  
VOLUME  
OK  
MENU  
INPUT  
SPEAKER  
POWER  
Remote Control Sensor  
Power/Standby Indicator  
Illuminates red in standby mode.  
Illuminates blue when the TV is switched on.  
A-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
BACK PANEL INFORMATION  
Only 19/22LD35 , 19/22LD34  
**  
**  
Image shown may differ from your TV.  
11  
12  
1
2
4
6
7
3
5
13  
9
10  
8
7
1
Power Cord Socket  
Component Input  
This TV operates on an AC power. The volt-  
age is indicated on the Specifications page.  
(p.137 to 147) Never attempt to operate  
the TV on DC power.  
Connect a component video/audio device to  
these jacks.  
8
9
RGB IN Input  
Connect the output from a PC.  
2
3
HDMI/DVI IN Input  
Connect an HDMI signal to HDMI IN. Or DVI  
(VIDEO) signal to HDMI/DVI port with DVI to  
HDMI cable.  
RS-232C IN (CONTROL & SERVICE) PORT  
Connect to the RS-232C port on a PC.  
This port is used for Service or Hotel mode.  
OPTICAL DIGITAL AUDIO OUT  
10  
Antenna Input  
Connect antenna or cable to this jack.  
Connect digital audio to various types of  
equipment.  
Connect to a Digital Audio Component.  
Use an Optical audio cable.  
11  
12  
USB Input  
Connect USB storage device to this jack.  
4
5
RGB/DVI Audio Input  
Connect the audio from a PC or DTV.  
PCMCIA (Personal Computer Memory  
Card International Association) Card Slot  
Insert the CI Module to PCMCIA CARD  
Audio/Video Input  
SLOT.  
Connect audio/video output from an external  
(This feature is not available in all countries.)  
device to these jacks.  
13  
Headphone Socket  
6
Euro Scart Socket (AV1)  
Plug the headphone into the headphone  
Connect scart socket input or output from an  
socket.  
external device to these jacks.  
A-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PREPARATION  
Only 26LD35 , 26LD34  
**  
**  
Image shown may differ from your TV.  
10  
11  
1
2
4
5
6
3
2
12  
13  
8
9
7
7
8
1
Power Cord Socket  
RGB IN Input  
This TV operates on an AC power. The volt-  
age is indicated on the Specifications page.  
(p.137 to 147) Never attempt to operate  
the TV on DC power.  
Connect the output from a PC.  
RS-232C IN (CONTROL & SERVICE) PORT  
Connect to the RS-232C port on a PC.  
This port is used for Service or Hotel mode.  
2
3
HDMI/DVI IN Input  
Connect an HDMI signal to HDMI IN. Or DVI  
(VIDEO) signal to HDMI/DVI port with DVI to  
HDMI cable.  
9
Antenna Input  
Connect antenna or cable to this jack.  
10  
USB Input  
Connect USB storage device to this jack.  
OPTICAL DIGITAL AUDIO OUT  
Connect digital audio to various types of  
equipment.  
PCMCIA (Personal Computer Memory  
Card International Association) Card Slot  
11  
Connect to a Digital Audio Component.  
Use an Optical audio cable.  
Insert the CI Module to PCMCIA CARD  
SLOT.  
4
5
RGB/DVI Audio Input  
Connect the audio from a PC or DTV.  
(This feature is not available in all countries.)  
12  
13  
Headphone Socket  
Euro Scart Socket (AV1)  
Plug the headphone into the headphone  
Connect scart socket input or output from an  
socket.  
external device to these jacks.  
6
Audio/Video Input  
Component Input  
Connect audio/video output from an external  
Connect a component video/audio device to  
device to these jacks.  
these jacks.  
A-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Only 32LD35 , 32LD34  
**  
**  
Image shown may differ from your TV.  
10  
11  
1
2
3
4
5
6
2
12  
13  
7
8
9
7
1
Power Cord Socket  
RS-232C IN (CONTROL & SERVICE) PORT  
Connect to the RS-232C port on a PC.  
This port is used for Service or Hotel mode.  
This TV operates on an AC power. The volt-  
age is indicated on the Specifications page.  
(p.137 to 147) Never attempt to operate  
the TV on DC power.  
8
9
RGB IN Input  
Connect the output from a PC.  
2
3
HDMI/DVI IN Input  
Connect an HDMI signal to HDMI IN. Or DVI  
(VIDEO) signal to HDMI/DVI port with DVI to  
HDMI cable.  
Antenna Input  
Connect antenna or cable to this jack.  
10  
11  
USB Input  
Connect USB storage device to this jack.  
OPTICAL DIGITAL AUDIO OUT  
Connect digital audio to various types of  
equipment.  
PCMCIA (Personal Computer Memory  
Card International Association) Card Slot  
Connect to a Digital Audio Component.  
Use an Optical audio cable.  
Insert the CI Module to PCMCIA CARD  
SLOT.  
4
5
RGB/DVI Audio Input  
Connect the audio from a PC or DTV.  
(This feature is not available in all countries.)  
12  
13  
Headphone Socket  
Euro Scart Socket (AV1)  
Plug the headphone into the headphone  
Connect scart socket input or output from an  
socket.  
external device to these jacks.  
Audio/Video Input  
6
Component Input  
Connect audio/video output from an external  
Connect a component video/audio device to  
device to these jacks.  
these jacks.  
A-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PREPARATION  
STAND INSTALLATION  
Image shown may differ from your TV.  
When assembling the desk type stand, check whether the bolt is fully tightened. (If not tightened fully,  
the product can tilt forward after the product installation.) If you tighten the bolt with excessive force,  
the bolt can deviate from abrasion of the tightening part of the bolt.  
Only 19/22LD35 , 19/22LD34  
** **  
Only 26/32LD35 , 26/32LD34  
** **  
Carefully place the TV screen side down  
on a cushioned surface to protect the  
screen from damage.  
Carefully place the TV screen side down  
on a cushioned surface to protect the  
screen from damage.  
1
1
2
Assemble the parts of the Stand Body with  
the Stand Base of the TV.  
Stand Body  
Assemble the TV as shown.  
2
Stand Base  
Assemble the TV as shown.  
3
4
Fix the 4 bolts securely using the holes in  
the back of the TV.  
A-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
NOT USING THE DESK-TYPE STAND  
Image shown may differ from your TV.  
When installing the wall-mounted unit, use the protection cover.  
Only 19/22LD35 , 19/22LD34  
** **  
Only 26/32LD35 , 26/32LD34  
**  
**  
Insert the Protection Cover into the TV until  
Carefully place the TV screen side down  
on a cushioned surface to protect the  
screen from damage.  
1
clicking sound.  
Protection Cover  
Loose the bolts from TV.  
2
Detach the stand from TV.  
3
4
Insert the Protection Cover into the TV.  
After removing the protection paper from  
the protection cover, adhere it to the TV as  
shown.  
Protection Cover  
A-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PREPARATION  
BACK COVER FOR WIRE ARRANGEMENT  
Image shown may differ from your TV.  
Only 19/22LD35 , 19/22LD34  
** **  
Only 26/32LD35 , 26/32LD34  
**  
**  
After connecting the cables as necessary, install  
Cable Holder as shown and bundle the cables.  
Connect the cables as necessary.  
1
To connect additional equipment, see the  
External Equipment Setup section.  
Open the Cable Management Clip as  
shown.  
2
3
Cable Holder  
Cable Management Clip  
Fit the Cable Management Clip as shown.  
NOTE  
Do not use the Cable Management Clip to lift  
the TV.  
- If the TV is dropped, you may be injured or the  
TV may be damaged.  
A-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SWIVEL STAND  
ATTACHING THE TV TO A  
(Except for 19/22LD35 , 19/22LD34 )  
**  
**  
DESK (Only 26/32LD35 , 26/32LD34  
**  
)
**  
Image shown may differ from your TV.  
Image shown may differ from your TV.  
The TV must be attached to desk so it cannot be  
pulled in a forward/backward direction, potentially  
causing injury or damaging the product. Use only  
an attached screw.  
After installing the TV, you can adjust the TV set  
manually to the left or right direction by 20  
degrees to suit your viewing position.  
1-Screw (provided as parts of the product)  
Stand  
POSITIONING YOUR DISPLAY  
(Only 19/22LD35 , 19/22LD34 )  
**  
**  
Image shown may differ from your TV.  
Adjust the position of the panel in various ways  
for maximum comfort.  
Desk  
• Tilt range  
WARNING  
To prevent TV from falling over, the TV  
should be securely attached to the floor/wall  
per installation instructions. Tipping, shaking,  
or rocking the machine may cause injury.  
A-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PREPARATION  
CAREFUL INSTALLATION  
ADVICE  
KENSINGTON SECURITY  
SYSTEM  
You should purchase necessary components  
to fix the TV safety and secure to the wall on  
the market.  
This feature is not available for all models.  
Image shown may differ from your TV.  
The TV is equipped with a Kensington Security  
System connector on the back panel. Connect  
the Kensington Security System cable as shown  
below.  
For the detailed installation and use of the  
Kensington Security System, refer to the user’s  
guide provided with the Kensington Security  
System.  
For further information, contact http://www.kens-  
ington.com, the internet homepage of the  
Kensington  
company. Kensington sells security systems for  
expensive electronic equipment such as note-  
book PCs and LCD projectors.  
Position the TV close to the wall to avoid the  
possibility of it falling when pushed.  
The instructions shown below are a safer way  
to set up the TV, by fixing it to the wall, avoid-  
ing the possibility of it falling forwards if pulled.  
This will prevent the TV from falling forward  
and causing injury. This will also prevent the  
TV from damage. Ensure that children do not  
climb or hang from the TV.  
1
1
2
2
NOTE  
Use the eye-bolts or TV brackets/bolts to fix the  
1
The Kensington Security System is an optional  
product to the wall as shown in the picture.  
accessory.  
(If your TV has bolts in the eyebolts, loosen  
then bolts.)  
* Insert the eye-bolts or TV brackets/bolts and  
tighten them securely in the upper holes.  
If the TV feels cold to the touch, there may be a  
small “flicker” when it is turned on.  
This is normal, there is nothing wrong with TV.  
Some minute dot defects may be visible on the  
screen, appearing as tiny red, green, or blue  
spots. However, they have no adverse effect on  
the monitor's performance.  
Secure the wall brackets with the bolts on the  
wall. Match the height of the bracket that is  
mounted on the wall.  
2
Avoid touching the LCD screen or holding your  
finger(s) against it for long periods of time.  
Doing so may produce some temporary distor-  
tion effects on the screen.  
3
Use a sturdy rope to tie the product for align-  
ment. It is safer to tie the rope so it becomes  
horizontal between the wall and the product.  
3
NOTE  
When moving the TV undo the cords first.  
Use a platform or cabinet strong and large  
enough to support the size and weight of the TV.  
To use the TV safely make sure that the height of  
the bracket on the wall and on the TV is the  
same.  
A-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The TV can be installed in various ways such as  
NOTE  
on a wall, or on a desktop etc.  
The TV is designed to be mounted horizontally.  
Should Install wall mount on a solid wall per-  
pendicular to the floor.  
Should use a special wall mount, if you want  
EARTHING  
to install it to ceiling or slanted wall.  
Ensure that you connect the earth wire to prevent  
possible electric shock. If grounding methods are  
not possible, have a qualified electrician install a  
separate circuit breaker.  
The surface that wall mount is to be mount-  
ed on should be of sufficient strength to sup-  
port the weight of TV set; e.g. concrete, nat-  
ural rock, brick and hollow block.  
Installing screw type and length depends on  
the wall mount used. Further information,  
refer to the instructions included with the  
mount.  
Do not try to earth the TV by connecting it to tele-  
phone wires, lightening rods or gas pipes.  
Power  
Supply  
LG is not liable for any accidents or damage  
to property or TV due to incorrect installa-  
tion:  
Circuit  
breaker  
- Where a non-compliant VESA wall mount  
is used.  
- Incorrect fastening of screws to surface  
which may cause TV to fall and cause per-  
sonal injury.  
- Not following the recommended Installation  
method.  
DESKTOP PEDESTAL  
INSTALLATION  
Image shown may differ from your TV.  
10 cm  
For adequate ventilation allow a clearance of 10  
cm all around the TV.  
10 cm  
10 cm  
10 cm  
10 cm  
10 cm  
10 cm  
10 cm  
10 cm  
WALL MOUNT: HORIZONTAL  
INSTALLATION  
We recommend the use of a LG Brand wall  
mounting bracket when mounting the TV to a  
wall.  
We recommend that you purchase a wall mount-  
ing bracket which supports VESA standard.  
LG recommends that wall mounting be per-  
Standard  
VESA  
Model  
Quantity  
Screw  
(A B)  
*
19/22LD35  
26/32LD35  
19/22LD34  
26/32LD34  
100 100  
M4  
M4  
M4  
M4  
4
4
4
4
**  
**  
**  
**  
*
200 100  
*
100 100  
*
200 100  
*
formed by a qualified professional installer.  
A-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PREPARATION  
REMOTE CONTROL KEY FUNCTIONS  
When using the remote control, aim it at the remote control sensor on the TV.  
Switches the TV on from standby or off to standby.  
(POWER)  
Adjust the Energy Saving mode of the TV.(p.95)  
ENERGY  
SAVING  
It helps you select and set images and sounds  
when connecting AV devices.(p.50)  
AV MODE  
External input mode rotate in regular sequence.  
(►  
INPUT  
p.43  
)
Selects Radio, TV and DTV channel.  
TV/RAD  
0 to 9 number Selects a programme.  
button  
Selects numbered items in a menu.  
LIST Displays the programme table.  
p.41)  
(►  
Q.VIEW Returns to the previously viewed programme.  
MENU  
Selects a menu.  
Clears all on-screen displays and returns to TV  
viewing from any menu.  
(►  
p.19  
)
GUIDE  
Shows programme guide.  
(►  
p.86  
)
Q. MENU  
Select the desired quick menu source. (Aspect  
Ratio, Clear Voice II , Picture Mode, Sound Mode,  
Audio (or Audio Language), Sleep Timer, Skip Off/  
On, USB Device).(p.18)  
BACK  
Allows the user to move return one step in an inter-  
active application, EPG or other user interaction  
function.  
EXIT  
Clears all on-screen displays and returns to TV  
viewing from any menu.  
INFO i  
Shows the present screen information.  
THUMBSTICK  
(Up/Down/Left/Right)  
Allows you to navigate the on-screen menus and  
adjust the system settings to your preference.  
OK  
Accepts your selection or displays the current  
mode.  
1
Coloured These buttons are used for teletext (on TELETEXT  
buttons  
models only), Programme edit.  
1
TELETEXT These buttons are used for teletext.  
BUTTONS  
For further details, see the ‘Teletext’ section.(►  
p.130)  
SUBTITLE Recalls your preferred subtitle in digital mode.  
A-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
VOLUME UP Adjusts the volume.  
/DOWN  
FAV Displays the selected favourite programme.  
MARK  
Select the input to apply the Picture Wizard  
settings.  
Check and un-check programmes in the USB  
menu.  
RATIO  
Selects your desired Aspect Ratio of picture.  
(p.92)  
MUTE Switches the sound on or off.  
Programme  
UP/DOWN  
Selects a programme.  
PAGE UP/  
DOWN  
Move from one full set of screen information to the  
next one.  
Controls SIMPLINK or MY MEDIA menu(Photo List  
and Music List).  
SIMPLINK /  
MY MEDIA Menu  
control buttons  
See a list of AV devices connected to TV.  
When you toggle this button, the Simplink menu  
appears at the screen.(p.46)  
Installing Batteries  
Open the battery compartment cover on the back and install  
the batteries matching correct polarity (+with +,-with -).  
Install two 1.5 V AAA batteries. Do not mix old or used batter-  
ies with new ones.  
Close cover.  
To remove the batteries, perform the installation actions in  
reverse.  
A-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PREPARATION  
LCD TV MODELS : 32/37/42/47LD4 , 26/32LD32 ,  
*** **  
26/32LD33  
**  
ACCESSORIES  
Ensure that the following accessories are included with your TV. If an accessory is missing, please  
contact the dealer where you purchased the TV.  
Image shown may differ from your TV.  
This item is not included for all models.  
Batteries  
(AAA)  
Remote Control  
Owner’s Manual  
Ferrite Core  
* Lightly wipe any stains or  
fingerprints on the surface  
of the TV with the polish-  
ing cloth.  
Polishing Cloth  
Polishing cloth for  
use on the screen.  
Do not use excessive  
force. This may cause  
scratching or discoloura-  
tion.  
(
This item is not included  
Power Cord  
for all models.  
)
or  
x 4  
x 8  
(M4x24)  
(Only 32/37/  
42/47LD42 ,  
(M4x20)  
(Only 32/37/  
42/47LD45 )  
1-screw for stand fixing  
(Only 32/37/42LD4  
Protection  
Cover  
,
***  
**  
**  
26/32LD32 ,  
**  
26/32LD32 ,  
**  
26/32LD33 )  
**  
26/32LD33 )  
**  
Bolts for stand assembly  
Use of ferrite core (This feature is not available for all models.)  
Ferrite core can be used to reduce the electromagnetic  
wave when connecting the power cord.  
The closer the location of the ferrite core to the power  
plug, the better it is.  
Install the power plug closely.  
A-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
FRONT PANEL CONTROLS  
NOTE  
TV can be placed in standby mode in order to reduce the power consumption. And TV should be  
switched off using the power switch on the TV if it will not be watched for some time, as this will  
reduce energy consumption.  
The energy consumed during use can be significantly reduced if the level of brightness of the  
picture is reduced, and this will reduce the overall running cost.  
CAUTION  
Do not step on the glass stand or subject it to any impact. It may break, causing possible injury  
from fragments of glass, or the TV may fall.  
Do not drag the TV. The floor or the product may be damaged.  
Only 32/37/42/47LD45  
**  
Image shown may differ from your TV.  
PROGRAMME  
VOLUME  
OK  
MENU  
INPUT  
POWER  
SPEAKER  
Remote Control Sensor  
Power/Standby Indicator  
Illuminates red in standby mode.  
Illuminates blue when the TV is switched on.  
A-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PREPARATION  
Only 32/37/42/47LD42 , 26/32LD32 , 26/32LD33  
** **  
**  
Only 26LD32 , 26LD33  
**  
**  
VOLUME  
POWER  
MENU  
PROGRAMME  
INPUT  
OK  
Only 32/37/42/47LD42 ,  
**  
32LD32 , 32LD33  
**  
**  
PROGRAMME  
VOLUME  
SPEAKER  
Remote Control Sensor  
OK  
MENU  
INPUT  
POWER  
Power/Standby Indicator  
Illuminates red in standby mode.  
Illuminates blue when the TV is  
switched on.  
A-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
BACK PANEL INFORMATION  
Image shown may differ from your TV.  
10  
11  
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
2
12  
13  
7
8
9
7
1
Power Cord Socket  
RS-232C IN (CONTROL & SERVICE) PORT  
Connect to the RS-232C port on a PC.  
This port is used for Service or Hotel mode.  
This TV operates on an AC power. The volt-  
age is indicated on the Specifications page.  
(p.137 to 147) Never attempt to operate  
the TV on DC power.  
8
9
RGB IN Input  
Connect the output from a PC.  
2
3
HDMI/DVI IN Input  
Connect an HDMI signal to HDMI IN. Or DVI  
(VIDEO) signal to HDMI/DVI port with DVI to  
HDMI cable.  
Antenna Input  
Connect antenna or cable to this jack.  
10  
11  
USB Input  
Connect USB storage device to this jack.  
OPTICAL DIGITAL AUDIO OUT  
Connect digital audio to various types of  
equipment.  
PCMCIA (Personal Computer Memory  
Card International Association) Card Slot  
Connect to a Digital Audio Component.  
Use an Optical audio cable.  
Insert the CI Module to PCMCIA CARD  
SLOT.  
4
5
RGB/DVI Audio Input  
Connect the audio from a PC or DTV.  
(This feature is not available in all countries.)  
12  
13  
Headphone Socket  
Euro Scart Socket (AV1)  
Plug the headphone into the headphone  
Connect scart socket input or output from an  
socket.  
external device to these jacks.  
Audio/Video Input  
6
Component Input  
Connect audio/video output from an external  
Connect a component video/audio device to  
device to these jacks.  
these jacks.  
A-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PREPARATION  
STAND INSTALLATION  
Image shown may differ from your TV  
When assembling the desk type stand, check whether the bolt is fully tightened. (If not tightened fully,  
the product can tilt forward after the product installation.) If you tighten the bolt with excessive force,  
the bolt can deviate from abrasion of the tightening part of the bolt.  
Only 32/37/42/47LD45  
**  
Only 32/37/42/47LD42 ,  
**  
Carefully place the TV screen side down  
on a cushioned surface to protect the  
screen from damage.  
26/32LD32 , 26/32LD33  
**  
**  
1
2
Carefully place the TV screen side down  
on a cushioned surface to protect the  
screen from damage.  
1
Assemble the parts of the Stand Body with  
the Cover Base of the TV.  
Assemble the TV as shown.  
2
Stand Body  
Cover Base  
Assemble the TV as shown.  
3
Fix the 4 bolts securely using the holes in  
the back of the TV.  
3
Fix the 4 bolts securely using the holes in  
the back of the TV.  
4
A-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
BACK COVER FOR  
ATTACHING THE TV TO A  
DESK  
WIRE ARRANGEMENT  
(Only 32/37/42LD4 , 26/32LD32 ,  
***  
**  
Image shown may differ from your TV.  
26/32LD33 )  
**  
Image shown may differ from your TV.  
Connect the cables as  
necessary.  
1
The TV must be attached to desk so it cannot  
be pulled in a forward/backward direction,  
potentially causing injury or damaging the  
product. Use only an attached screw.  
To connect additional  
equipment, see the  
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT  
SETUP section.  
Open the Cable Management Clip as  
shown.  
2
3
1-Screw  
(provided as parts of the product)  
Stand  
Cable Management Clip  
Fit the Cable Management Clip as shown.  
Desk  
WARNING  
To prevent TV from falling over, the TV  
should be securely attached to the floor/wall  
per installation instructions. Tipping, shaking,  
or rocking the machine may cause injury.  
NOTE  
Do not use the Cable Management Clip to lift  
NOT USING THE  
the TV.  
DESK-TYPE STAND  
- If the TV is dropped, you may be injured or the  
TV may be damaged.  
Image shown may differ from your TV.  
When installing the wall-mounted unit,  
use the protection cover.  
Insert the Protection  
Cover into the TV until  
clicking sound.  
Protection Cover  
A-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PREPARATION  
CAREFUL INSTALLATION  
ADVICE  
KENSINGTON SECURITY  
SYSTEM  
You should purchase necessary components  
to fix the TV safety and secure to the wall on  
the market.  
This feature is not available for all models.  
Image shown may differ from your TV.  
The TV is equipped with a Kensington Security  
System connector on the back panel. Connect  
the Kensington Security System cable as shown  
below.  
For the detailed installation and use of the  
Kensington Security System, refer to the user’s  
guide provided with the Kensington Security  
System.  
For further information, contact http://www.kens-  
ington.com, the internet homepage of the  
Kensington  
company. Kensington sells security systems for  
expensive electronic equipment such as note-  
book PCs and LCD projectors.  
Position the TV close to the wall to avoid the  
possibility of it falling when pushed.  
The instructions shown below are a safer way  
to set up the TV, by fixing it to the wall, avoid-  
ing the possibility of it falling forwards if pulled.  
This will prevent the TV from falling forward  
and causing injury. This will also prevent the  
TV from damage. Ensure that children do not  
climb or hang from the TV.  
1
1
10 cm  
2
2
NOTE  
Use the eye-bolts or TV brackets/bolts to fix the  
product to the wall as shown in the picture.  
(If your TV has bolts in the eyebolts, loosen  
then bolts.)  
* Insert the eye-bolts or TV brackets/bolts and  
tighten them securely in the upper holes.  
The Kensington Security System is an  
1
2
optional accessory.  
If the TV feels cold to the touch, there may  
be a small “flicker” when it is turned on.  
This is normal, there is nothing wrong with  
TV.  
Some minute dot defects may be visible on  
the screen, appearing as tiny red, green, or  
blue spots. However, they have no adverse  
effect on the monitor's performance.  
Secure the wall brackets with the bolts on  
the wall. Match the height of the bracket  
that is mounted on the wall.  
Avoid touching the LCD screen or holding  
your finger(s) against it for long periods of  
time. Doing so may produce some temporary  
distortion effects on the screen.  
3
Use a sturdy rope to tie the product for align-  
ment. It is safer to tie the rope so it becomes  
horizontal between the wall and the product.  
3
NOTE  
When moving the TV undo the cords first.  
Use a platform or cabinet strong and large  
enough to support the size and weight of the  
TV.  
To use the TV safely make sure that the  
height of the bracket on the wall and on the  
TV is the same.  
A-20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The TV can be installed in various ways such as  
NOTE  
on a wall, or on a desktop etc.  
The TV is designed to be mounted horizontally.  
Should Install wall mount on a solid wall per-  
pendicular to the floor.  
Should use a special wall mount, if you want to  
EARTHING  
install it to ceiling or slanted wall.  
Ensure that you connect the earth wire to  
prevent possible electric shock. If grounding  
methods are not possible, have a qualified  
electrician install a separate circuit breaker.  
The surface that wall mount is to be mounted  
on should be of sufficient strength to support  
the weight of TV set; e.g. concrete, natural  
rock, brick and hollow block.  
Installing screw type and length depends on  
the wall mount used. Further information, refer  
to the instructions included with the mount.  
Do not try to earth the TV by connecting it to  
telephone wires, lightening rods or gas pipes.  
LG is not liable for any accidents or damage to  
Power Supply  
Circuit breaker  
property or TV due to incorrect installation:  
- Where a non-compliant VESA wall mount is  
used.  
- Incorrect fastening of screws to surface  
which may cause TV to fall and cause per-  
sonal injury.  
- Not following the recommended Installation  
method.  
DESKTOP PEDESTAL  
INSTALLATION  
10 cm  
10 cm  
Image shown may differ from your TV.  
10 cm  
10 cm  
For adequate ventilation allow a clearance of 10  
cm all around the TV.  
10 cm  
10 cm  
10 cm  
10 cm  
10 cm  
Standard  
Screw  
VESA  
(A B)  
Model  
32LD4  
37/42/47LD4  
26/32LD32  
Quantity  
*
200 100 M4  
200 200 M6  
*
200 100 M4  
4
4
4
4
***  
*
WALL MOUNT: HORIZONTAL  
INSTALLATION  
***  
**  
**  
*
200 100 M4  
*
26/32LD33  
We recommend the use of a LG Brand wall  
mounting bracket when mounting the TV to a  
wall.  
We recommend that you purchase a wall  
mounting bracket which supports VESA stan-  
dard.  
SWIVEL STAND  
Image shown may differ from your TV.  
After installing the TV, you can adjust the TV set  
manually to the left or right direction by 20  
degrees to suit your viewing position.  
LG recommends that wall mounting be per-  
formed by a qualified professional installer.  
A-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PREPARATION  
REMOTE CONTROL KEY FUNCTIONS  
When using the remote control, aim it at the remote control sensor on the TV.  
Switches the TV on from standby or off to standby.  
(POWER)  
Adjust the Energy Saving mode of the TV.(p.95)  
ENERGY  
SAVING  
It helps you select and set images and sounds  
when connecting AV devices.(p.50)  
AV MODE  
External input mode rotate in regular sequence.  
(►  
INPUT  
p.43  
)
Selects Radio, TV and DTV channel.  
TV/RAD  
0 to 9 number Selects a programme.  
button  
Selects numbered items in a menu.  
LIST Displays the programme table.  
p.41)  
(►  
Q.VIEW Returns to the previously viewed programme.  
MENU  
Selects a menu.  
Clears all on-screen displays and returns to TV  
viewing from any menu.  
(►  
p.19  
)
GUIDE  
Shows programme guide.  
(►  
p.86  
)
Q. MENU  
Select the desired quick menu source. (Aspect  
Ratio, Clear Voice II , Picture Mode, Sound Mode,  
Audio (or Audio Language), Sleep Timer, Skip Off/  
On, USB Device).(p.18)  
Allows the user to move return one step in an inter-  
active application, EPG or other user interaction  
function.  
BACK  
EXIT  
Clears all on-screen displays and returns to TV  
viewing from any menu.  
INFO i  
Shows the present screen information.  
Allows you to navigate the on-screen menus and  
adjust the system settings to your preference.  
THUMBSTICK  
(Up/Down/Left/Right)  
1
Accepts your selection or displays the current  
mode.  
OK  
Coloured These buttons are used for teletext (on TELETEXT  
buttons  
models only), Programme edit.  
1
TELETEXT These buttons are used for teletext.  
BUTTONS  
For further details, see the ‘Teletext’ section.(►  
p.130)  
SUBTITLE Recalls your preferred subtitle in digital mode.  
A-22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
VOLUME UP Adjusts the volume.  
/DOWN  
FAV Displays the selected favourite programme.  
MARK  
Select the input to apply the Picture Wizard  
settings.  
Check and un-check programmes in the USB  
menu.  
RATIO  
Selects your desired Aspect Ratio of picture.  
(p.92)  
MUTE Switches the sound on or off.  
Programme  
UP/DOWN  
Selects a programme.  
PAGE UP/  
DOWN  
Move from one full set of screen information to the  
next one.  
Controls SIMPLINK or MY MEDIA menu(Photo List  
and Music List).  
SIMPLINK /  
MY MEDIA Menu  
control buttons  
See a list of AV devices connected to TV.  
When you toggle this button, the Simplink menu  
appears at the screen.(p.46)  
Installing Batteries  
Open the battery compartment cover on the back and install  
the batteries matching correct polarity (+with +,-with -).  
Install two 1.5 V AAA batteries. Do not mix old or used batter-  
ies with new ones.  
Close cover.  
To remove the batteries, perform the installation actions in  
reverse.  
A-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PREPARATION  
LCD TV MODELS : 32/42/46/52/60LD5  
ACCESSORIES  
***  
Ensure that the following accessories are included with your TV. If an accessory is missing, please  
contact the dealer where you purchased the TV.  
Image shown may differ from your TV.  
This item is not included for all models.  
Batteries  
(AAA)  
Owner’s Manual  
Remote Control  
* Lightly wipe any  
stains or fingerprints  
on the surface of the  
TV with the polishing  
cloth.  
Polishing Cloth  
Polishing cloth for  
use on the screen.  
Do not use exces-  
sive force. This may  
cause scratching or  
discolouration.  
Ferrite Core  
(
This item is not included  
Power Cord  
for all models.  
)
x 8  
M4 x 20  
Protection  
Cover  
1-screw for stand fixing  
(Only 32/42LD5  
Bolts for stand assembly  
)
***  
Use of ferrite core (This feature is not available for all models.)  
Ferrite core can be used to reduce the electromagnetic  
wave when connecting the power cord.  
The closer the location of the ferrite core to the power  
plug, the better it is.  
Install the power plug closely.  
A-24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
FRONT PANEL CONTROLS  
NOTE  
TV can be placed in standby mode in order to reduce the power consumption. And TV should be  
switched off using the power switch on the TV if it will not be watched for some time, as this will  
reduce energy consumption.  
The energy consumed during use can be significantly reduced if the level of brightness of the picture  
is reduced, and this will reduce the overall running cost.  
CAUTION  
Do not step on the glass stand or subject it to any impact. It may break, causing possible injury from frag-  
ments of glass, or the TV may fall.  
Do not drag the TV. The floor or the product may be damaged.  
Image shown may differ from your TV.  
PROGRAMME  
VOLUME  
OK  
MENU  
INPUT  
SPEAKER  
POWER  
Remote Control Sensor  
Power/Standby Indicator  
Intelligent Sensor  
Adjusts picture according to  
the surrounding conditions.  
Illuminates red in standby mode.  
Illuminates blue when the TV is  
switched on.  
A-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PREPARATION  
BACK PANEL INFORMATION  
Image shown may differ from your TV.  
11  
12  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
2
13  
14  
8
9
10  
8
1
2
Power Cord Socket  
RS-232C IN (CONTROL & SERVICE) PORT  
Connect to the RS-232C port on a PC.  
This port is used for Service or Hotel mode.  
This TV operates on an AC power. The volt-  
age is indicated on the Specifications page.  
(p.137 to 147) Never attempt to operate  
the TV on DC power.  
9
WIRELESS Control  
Connect the Wireless Media Box to the  
HDMI/DVI IN Input  
WIRELESS CONTROL jack on the TV.  
Connect an HDMI signal to HDMI IN. Or DVI  
(VIDEO) signal to HDMI/DVI port with DVI to  
HDMI cable.  
10 Antenna Input  
Connect antenna or cable to this jack.  
3
4
RGB IN Input  
11  
USB Input  
Connect the output from a PC.  
Connect USB storage device to this jack.  
OPTICAL DIGITAL AUDIO OUT  
12  
PCMCIA (Personal Computer Memory  
Connect digital audio to various types of  
Card International Association) Card Slot  
equipment.  
Insert the CI Module to PCMCIA CARD  
Connect to a Digital Audio Component.  
Use an Optical audio cable.  
SLOT.  
(This feature is not available in all countries.)  
5
6
RGB/DVI Audio Input  
13  
Headphone Socket  
Connect the audio from a PC or DTV.  
Plug the headphone into the headphone  
socket.  
Euro Scart Socket (AV1)  
14  
Connect scart socket input or output from an  
Audio/Video Input  
external device to these jacks.  
Connect audio/video output from an external  
device to these jacks.  
7
Component Input  
Connect a component video/audio device to  
these jacks.  
A-26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
STAND INSTALLATION  
BACK COVER FOR  
Image shown may differ from your TV.  
WIRE ARRANGEMENT  
When assembling the desk type stand, check  
whether the bolt is fully tightened. (If not tightened  
fully, the product can tilt forward after the product  
installation.) If you tighten the bolt with excessive  
force, the bolt can deviate from abrasion of the  
tightening part of the bolt.  
Image shown may differ from your TV.  
Connect the cables as necessary.  
1
To connect additional equipment, see the  
External Equipment Setup section.  
Carefully place the TV screen side down  
on a cushioned surface to protect the  
1
screen from damage.  
Open the Cable Management Clip as  
shown.  
2
3
Assemble the parts of the Stand Body with  
the Cover Base of the TV.  
2
Stand Body  
Cable Management Clip  
Cover Base  
Fit the Cable Management Clip as shown.  
Assemble the TV as shown.  
3
Fix the 4 bolts securely using the holes in  
the back of the TV.  
4
NOTE  
Do not use the Cable Management Clip to lift  
the TV.  
- If the TV is dropped, you may be injured or the  
TV may be damaged.  
A-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PREPARATION  
ATTACHING THE TV TO A  
NOT USING THE  
DESK (Only 32/42LD5  
)
DESK-TYPE STAND  
***  
Image shown may differ from your TV.  
When installing the wall-mounted unit, use the  
protection cover.  
Image shown may differ from your TV.  
The TV must be attached to desk so it cannot be  
pulled in a forward/backward direction, potentially  
causing injury or damaging the product. Use only  
an attached screw.  
Insert the Protection Cover into the TV until  
clicking sound.  
1-Screw  
(provided as parts of the product)  
Stand  
Protection Cover  
SWIVEL STAND  
Image shown may differ from your TV.  
After installing the TV, you can adjust the TV set  
manually to the left or right direction by 20  
degrees to suit your viewing position.  
Desk  
WARNING  
To prevent TV from falling over, the TV  
should be securely attached to the floor/wall  
per installation instructions. Tipping, shaking,  
or rocking the machine may cause injury.  
A-28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CAREFUL INSTALLATION  
ADVICE  
KENSINGTON SECURITY  
SYSTEM  
You should purchase necessary components  
to fix the TV safety and secure to the wall on  
the market.  
This feature is not available for all models.  
Image shown may differ from your TV.  
Position the TV close to the wall to avoid the  
The TV is equipped with a Kensington Security  
System connector on the back panel. Connect  
the Kensington Security System cable as shown  
below.  
For the detailed installation and use of the  
Kensington Security System, refer to the user’s  
guide provided with the Kensington Security  
System.  
possibility of it falling when pushed.  
The instructions shown below are a safer way  
to set up the TV, by fixing it to the wall, avoid-  
ing the possibility of it falling forwards if pulled.  
This will prevent the TV from falling forward  
and causing injury. This will also prevent the  
TV from damage. Ensure that children do not  
climb or hang from the TV.  
For further information, contact http://www.kens-  
ington.com, the internet homepage of the  
Kensington  
1
1
company. Kensington sells security systems for  
expensive electronic equipment such as note-  
book PCs and LCD projectors.  
2
2
NOTE  
Use the eye-bolts or TV brackets/bolts to fix  
the product to the wall as shown in the pic-  
ture.  
(If your TV has bolts in the eyebolts, loosen  
then bolts.)  
* Insert the eye-bolts or TV brackets/bolts and  
tighten them securely in the upper holes.  
1
The Kensington Security System is an  
optional accessory.  
If the TV feels cold to the touch, there may  
be a small “flicker” when it is turned on.  
This is normal, there is nothing wrong with  
TV.  
Secure the wall brackets with the bolts on the  
Some minute dot defects may be visible on  
the screen, appearing as tiny red, green, or  
blue spots. However, they have no adverse  
effect on the monitor's performance.  
2
wall. Match the height of the bracket that is  
mounted on the wall.  
Avoid touching the LCD screen or holding  
your finger(s) against it for long periods of  
time. Doing so may produce some tempo-  
rary distortion effects on the screen.  
3
Use a sturdy rope to tie the product for align-  
ment. It is safer to tie the rope so it becomes  
horizontal between the wall and the product.  
3
NOTE  
When moving the TV undo the cords first.  
Use a platform or cabinet strong and large  
enough to support the size and weight of the  
TV.  
To use the TV safely make sure that the  
height of the bracket on the wall and on the  
TV is the same.  
A-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PREPARATION  
The TV can be installed in various ways such as  
NOTE  
on a wall, or on a desktop etc.  
The TV is designed to be mounted horizontally.  
Should Install wall mount on a solid wall per-  
pendicular to the floor.  
Should use a special wall mount, if you want  
EARTHING  
to install it to ceiling or slanted wall.  
Ensure that you connect the earth wire to prevent  
possible electric shock. If grounding methods are  
not possible, have a qualified electrician install a  
separate circuit breaker.  
The surface that wall mount is to be mount-  
ed on should be of sufficient strength to sup-  
port the weight of TV set; e.g. concrete, nat-  
ural rock, brick and hollow block.  
Do not try to earth the TV by connecting it to tele-  
phone wires, lightening rods or gas pipes.  
Installing screw type and length depends on  
the wall mount used. Further information,  
refer to the instructions included with the  
mount.  
LG is not liable for any accidents or damage  
to property or TV due to incorrect installa-  
tion:  
Power  
Supply  
Circuit  
breaker  
- Where a non-compliant VESA wall mount  
is used.  
- Incorrect fastening of screws to surface  
which may cause TV to fall and cause per-  
sonal injury.  
- Not following the recommended Installation  
method.  
DESKTOP PEDESTAL  
INSTALLATION  
10 cm  
Image shown may differ from your TV.  
10 cm  
For adequate ventilation allow a clearance of 10  
cm all around the TV.  
10 cm  
10 cm  
10 cm  
10 cm  
10 cm  
10 cm  
10 cm  
WALL MOUNT: HORIZONTAL  
INSTALLATION  
We recommend the use of a LG Brand wall  
mounting bracket when mounting the TV to a  
wall.  
We recommend that you purchase a wall  
mounting bracket which supports VESA stan-  
dard.  
Standard  
VESA  
Model  
32LD5  
Quantity  
Screw  
(A B)  
*
200 100  
M4  
M6  
M6  
M6  
M6  
4
4
4
4
4
***  
*
42LD5  
46LD5  
52LD5  
60LD5  
200 200  
*
***  
***  
***  
***  
200 200  
*
400 400  
*
LG recommends that wall mounting be per-  
formed by a qualified professional installer.  
400 400  
*
A-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
REMOTE CONTROL KEY FUNCTIONS  
When using the remote control, aim it at the remote control sensor on the TV.  
Switches the TV on from standby or off to standby.  
(POWER)  
Adjust the Energy Saving mode of the TV.(p.95)  
ENERGY  
SAVING  
It helps you select and set images and sounds  
when connecting AV devices.(p.50)  
AV MODE  
External input mode rotate in regular sequence.  
(►  
INPUT  
p.43  
)
Selects Radio, TV and DTV channel.  
TV/RAD  
0 to 9 number Selects a programme.  
button  
Selects numbered items in a menu.  
LIST Displays the programme table.  
p.41)  
(►  
Q.VIEW Returns to the previously viewed programme.  
MENU  
Selects a menu.  
Clears all on-screen displays and returns to TV  
viewing from any menu.  
(►  
p.19  
)
GUIDE  
Shows programme guide  
(►  
p.86  
)
Q. MENU  
Select the desired quick menu source. (Aspect  
Ratio, Clear Voice II , Picture Mode, Sound Mode,  
Audio (or Audio Language), Sleep Timer, Skip Off/  
On, USB Device).(p.18)  
Allows the user to move return one step in an inter-  
active application, EPG or other user interaction  
function.  
BACK  
Clears all on-screen displays and returns to TV  
viewing from any menu.  
EXIT  
INFO i  
Shows the present screen information.  
THUMBSTICK  
(Up/Down/Left/Right)  
Allows you to navigate the on-screen menus and  
adjust the system settings to your preference.  
1
OK  
Accepts your selection or displays the current  
mode.  
Coloured These buttons are used for teletext (on TELETEXT  
buttons  
models only), Programme edit.  
1
TELETEXT These buttons are used for teletext.  
BUTTONS  
For further details, see the ‘Teletext’ section.(►  
p.130)  
SUBTITLE Recalls your preferred subtitle in digital mode.  
A-31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PREPARATION  
VOLUME UP Adjusts the volume.  
/DOWN  
FAV Displays the selected favourite programme.  
MARK  
Select the input to apply the Picture Wizard  
settings.  
Check and un-check programmes in the USB  
menu.  
RATIO  
Selects your desired Aspect Ratio of picture.  
(p.92)  
MUTE Switches the sound on or off.  
Programme  
UP/DOWN  
Selects a programme.  
PAGE UP/  
DOWN  
Move from one full set of screen information to the  
next one.  
Controls SIMPLINK or MY MEDIA menu(Photo List  
and Music List).  
SIMPLINK /  
MY MEDIA Menu  
control buttons  
See a list of AV devices connected to TV.  
When you toggle this button, the Simplink menu  
appears at the screen.(p.46)  
Switches the Audio Description On or Off.  
AD  
Installing Batteries  
Open the battery compartment cover on the back and install  
the batteries matching correct polarity (+with +,-with -).  
Install two 1.5 V AAA batteries. Do not mix old or used batter-  
ies with new ones.  
Close cover.  
To remove the batteries, perform the installation actions in  
reverse.  
A-32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
LED LCD TV MODELS : 19/22/26/32LE3 , 32/37/42LE4 ,  
***  
***  
22/26LE5 , 32/37/42/47/55LE5  
***  
***  
ACCESSORIES  
Ensure that the following accessories are included with your TV. If an accessory is missing, please  
contact the dealer where you purchased the TV.  
This item is not included for all models.  
Image shown may differ from your TV.  
* Lightly wipe any  
stains or fingerprints on  
the surface of the TV  
with the polishing cloth.  
Polishing Cloth  
Polishing cloth for  
use on the screen.  
or  
Do not use excessive  
force. This may cause  
scratching or discolou-  
ration.  
Owner’s Manual  
Batteries  
(AAA)  
Remote Control  
Only 19/22/26LE3 , 22/26LE5  
***  
***  
x 4  
x 4  
(M4x14)  
(M4x20)  
(Only 26LE3  
Cable Holder  
,
DC Adapter 4-Ring spacers  
***  
Power Cord  
26LE5  
)
(Only 26LE3  
,
***  
Bolts for stand assembly  
***  
26LE5  
)
***  
Only 32LE3 , 32/37/42LE4 , 32/37/42/47/55LE5  
***  
***  
***  
Cable Holder  
x 4  
(M4x26)  
x 4  
(M4x16)  
x 4  
(M4x24)  
x 4  
(M4x22)  
1-screw for stand  
fixing  
(Only  
37/42LE4  
37/42LE5  
x 2  
(Only  
(Only  
(Only 32LE3  
32LE4 , 32LE5  
***  
,
***  
,
)
***  
***  
47/55LE5  
)
32LE3  
,
,
)
***  
***  
)
***  
32LE4  
32LE5  
***  
***  
Component gender cable,  
AV gender cable  
Bolts for stand assembly  
Use of ferrite core (This feature is  
not available for all models.)  
Ferrite core can be used to reduce the elec-  
tromagnetic wave when connecting the  
power cord.  
Ferrite Core  
(
This item is not included  
for all models.  
)
The closer the location of the ferrite core to  
the power plug, the better it is.  
Install the power plug closely.  
A-33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PREPARATION  
FRONT PANEL CONTROLS  
NOTE  
TV can be placed in standby mode in order to reduce the power consumption. And TV should be  
switched off using the power switch on the TV if it will not be watched for some time, as this will  
reduce energy consumption.  
The energy consumed during use can be significantly reduced if the level of brightness of the picture  
is reduced, and this will reduce the overall running cost.  
CAUTION  
Do not step on the glass stand or subject it to any impact. It may break, causing possible injury from frag-  
ments of glass, or the TV may fall.  
Do not drag the TV. The floor or the product may be damaged.  
Image shown may differ from your TV.  
Only 32/37/42LE4  
Power/Standby Indicator  
Only 32/37/42LE4  
***  
***  
Note: You can turn the Power Indicator on  
or off in the OPTION menu.  
PROGRAMME  
VOLUME  
P
OK  
OK  
MENU  
MENU  
INPUT  
POWER  
Touch Sensor  
INPUT  
You can use the  
desired button func-  
tion by touching.  
SPEAKER  
/ I  
Only 19/22/26LE3 , 22/26LE5  
***  
Only 19/22LE34  
Only 19/22/26LE33  
***  
**  
**  
VOLUME MENU  
POWER  
1
2
1
2
1
2
Power/Standby Indicator  
Illuminates red in standby mode.  
The LED is off while the TV remains on.  
PROGRAMME  
OK  
INPUT  
Remote Control Sensor  
Only 32LE3 , 32/37/42LE4 , 32/37/42/47/55LE5  
*** *** ***  
Only 32LE3 , 32/37/42/47/55LE5  
*** ***  
VOLUME POWER  
MENU  
Remote Control Sensor  
Intelligent Sensor  
Adjusts picture according to  
the surrounding conditions.  
Power/Standby Indicator  
Note: You can turn the Power Indicator on  
PROGRAMME  
OK  
INPUT  
A-34  
or off in the OPTION menu.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
BACK PANEL INFORMATION  
Only 19/22LE3 , 22LE5  
*** ***  
Image shown may differ from your TV.  
11  
12  
13  
1
3
5
6
2
4
8
9
10  
7
7
1
2
DC ADAPTER PORT  
Connect to the power cord socket.  
HDMI/DVI IN Input  
Connect an HDMI signal to HDMI IN. Or DVI  
(VIDEO) signal to HDMI/DVI port with DVI to  
HDMI cable.  
OPTICAL DIGITAL AUDIO OUT  
Connect digital audio to various types of  
equipment.  
Connect to a Digital Audio Component.  
Use an Optical audio cable.  
8
9
RGB IN Input  
Connect the output from a PC.  
RS-232C IN (CONTROL & SERVICE) PORT  
Connect to the RS-232C port on a PC.  
This port is used for Service or Hotel mode.  
3
4
RGB/DVI Audio Input  
Connect the audio from a PC or DTV.  
10  
Antenna Input  
Connect antenna or cable to this jack.  
Audio/Video Input  
Connect audio/video output from an external  
device to these jacks.  
11  
12  
USB Input  
Connect USB storage device to this jack.  
Euro Scart Socket (AV1)  
Connect scart socket input or output from an  
external device to these jacks.  
5
6
PCMCIA (Personal Computer Memory  
Card International Association) Card Slot  
Insert the CI Module to PCMCIA CARD SLOT.  
Component Input  
Connect a component video/audio device to  
these jacks.  
(This feature is not available in all countries.)  
13  
Headphone Socket  
Plug the headphone into the headphone  
socket.  
A-35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PREPARATION  
Only 26LE3 , 26LE5  
*** ***  
Image shown may differ from your TV.  
11  
12  
7
13  
1
3
5
6
2
4
8
9
10  
7
7
1
2
DC ADAPTER PORT  
Connect to the power cord socket.  
HDMI/DVI IN Input  
Connect an HDMI signal to HDMI IN. Or DVI  
(VIDEO) signal to HDMI/DVI port with DVI to  
HDMI cable.  
OPTICAL DIGITAL AUDIO OUT  
Connect digital audio to various types of  
equipment.  
Connect to a Digital Audio Component.  
Use an Optical audio cable.  
8
9
RGB IN Input  
Connect the output from a PC.  
RS-232C IN (CONTROL & SERVICE) PORT  
Connect to the RS-232C port on a PC.  
This port is used for Service or Hotel mode.  
3
4
RGB/DVI Audio Input  
Connect the audio from a PC or DTV.  
10  
Antenna Input  
Connect antenna or cable to this jack.  
Audio/Video Input  
Connect audio/video output from an external  
device to these jacks.  
11  
12  
USB Input  
Connect USB storage device to this jack.  
Euro Scart Socket (AV1)  
Connect scart socket input or output from an  
external device to these jacks.  
5
6
PCMCIA (Personal Computer Memory  
Card International Association) Card Slot  
Insert the CI Module to PCMCIA CARD SLOT.  
Component Input  
Connect a component video/audio device to  
these jacks.  
(This feature is not available in all countries.)  
13  
Headphone Socket  
Plug the headphone into the headphone  
socket.  
A-36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Only 32LE3 , 32/37/42LE4 , 32/37/42/47/55LE5  
***  
***  
***  
Image shown may differ from your TV.  
CAUTION  
12  
13  
1
2
Use a product with the following  
thickness for optimal connection to  
HDMI cable (Only HDMI IN 4) /  
USB device.  
14  
6
10  
2
4
5
3
*A 10 mm  
7
8
11  
9
10  
8
9
1
Power Cord Socket  
RS-232C IN (CONTROL & SERVICE) PORT  
Connect to the RS-232C port on a PC.  
This port is used for Service or Hotel mode.  
This TV operates on an AC power. The volt-  
age is indicated on the Specifications page.  
(p.137 to 147) Never attempt to operate  
the TV on DC power.  
WIRELESS CONTROL  
Connect the Wireless Media Box to the  
2
3
HDMI/DVI IN Input  
WIRELESS CONTROL jack on the TV.  
Connect an HDMI signal to HDMI IN. Or DVI  
(VIDEO) signal to HDMI/DVI port with DVI to  
HDMI cable.  
Audio/Video Input  
10  
Connect audio/video output from an external  
device to these jacks.  
OPTICAL DIGITAL AUDIO OUT  
11  
12  
13  
Antenna Input  
Connect antenna or cable to this jack.  
Connect digital audio to various types of  
equipment.  
Connect to a Digital Audio Component.  
Use an Optical audio cable.  
USB Input  
Connect USB storage device to this jack.  
4
5
RGB/DVI Audio Input  
Connect the audio from a PC or DTV.  
PCMCIA (Personal Computer Memory  
Card International Association) Card Slot  
Insert the CI Module to PCMCIA CARD  
Euro Scart Socket (AV1)  
SLOT.  
Connect scart socket input or output from an  
(This feature is not available in all countries.)  
external device to these jacks.  
14  
Headphone Socket  
6
7
Component Input  
Plug the headphone into the headphone  
Connect a component video/audio device to  
socket.  
these jacks.  
RGB IN Input  
Connect the output from a PC.  
A-37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PREPARATION  
STAND INSTALLATION  
Image shown may differ from your TV.  
When assembling the desk type stand, check whether the bolt is fully tightened. (If not tightened fully,  
the product can tilt forward after the product installation.) If you tighten the bolt with excessive force,  
the bolt can deviate from abrasion of the tightening part of the bolt.  
Only 26/32LE3 , 32/42/47LE4 ,  
*** ***  
Only 19/22LE3 , 22LE5  
*** ***  
26LE5 , 32/37/42/47/55LE5  
*** ***  
Carefully place the TV screen side down  
on a cushioned surface to protect the  
screen from damage.  
1
2
Carefully place the TV screen side down  
on a cushioned surface to protect the  
screen from damage.  
1
Assemble the parts of the Stand Body with  
the Stand Base of the TV.  
2
Assemble the parts of the Stand Body with  
the Stand Base of the TV.  
M4 X 22(Only 32LE3  
,
***  
32LE4 , 32LE5  
M4 X 24(Only 37/42LE4 ,  
)
*** ***  
Stand Body  
***  
Stand  
Body  
37/42LE5  
M4 X 26 (Only 47/55LE5  
)
***  
)
***  
Stand Base  
M4 X 20  
(Only 26LE3  
Stand  
Base  
,
***  
26LE5  
)
***  
Assemble the TV as shown.  
Assemble the TV as shown.  
3
4
3
Fix the 4 bolts securely using the holes in  
the back of the TV.  
Assemble the parts of the Stand Rear  
Cover with the TV.  
4
5
Stand Rear  
Cover  
M4 X 14  
Fix the 4 bolts securely using the holes in  
the back of the TV.  
M4 X 16  
M4 X 14  
(Only 26LE3  
(Only 32LE3 ,  
***  
A-38  
,
32/37/42LE4  
32/37/42/47/55LE5 )  
,
***  
***  
26LE5  
)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
***  
***  
BACK COVER FOR WIRE ARRANGEMENT  
Image shown may differ from your TV.  
Only 19/22/26LE3 , 22/26LE5  
*** ***  
Only 32LE3 , 32/37/42LE4 ,  
***  
***  
32/37/42/47/55LE5  
***  
After connecting the cables as necessary,  
install Cable Holder as shown and bundle the  
cables.  
Secure the power cord with the Cable  
1
Holder on the TV back cover.  
It will help prevent the power cable from  
being removed by accident.  
Cable Holder  
After connecting the cables as necessary,  
install Cable Holder as shown and bundle  
the cables.  
2
Cable Holder  
Cable Holder  
A-39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PREPARATION  
ATTACHING THE TV TO A  
CONNECTION OF TV  
DESK (Only 32LE3 , 32LE4 , 32LE5  
)
***  
***  
***  
(Only 19/22/26LE3  
22/26LE5 )  
***  
***,  
Ima4e shown may differ from your TV.  
Image shown may differ from your TV.  
The TV must be attached to desk so it cannot be  
pulled in a forward/backward direction, potentially  
causing injury or damaging the product. Use only  
an attached screw.  
DC Adapter  
1-Screw  
(provided as parts of the product)  
Connect the antenna cable to the antenna  
input port on the TV.  
1
Stand  
Connect the DC adapter plug to the power  
input jack on the TV.  
2
Connect the power cord to the DC adapter  
first, then plug the power cord into the wall  
power outlet.  
3
Desk  
CAUTION  
WARNING  
Please be sure to connect the TV to the DC  
power adapter before connecting the TV's power  
plug to a wall power outlet.  
To prevent TV from falling over, the TV  
should be securely attached to the floor/wall  
per installation instructions. Tipping, shaking,  
or rocking the machine may cause injury.  
SWIVEL STAND  
DESKTOP PEDESTAL  
INSTALLATION  
(Only 26/32LE3  
32/37/42LE4  
***,  
***,  
)
26LE5  
***,  
32/37/42/47/55LE5  
***  
Image shown may differ from your TV.  
Image shown may differ from your TV.  
For adequate ventilation allow a clearance of 10  
cm all around the TV.  
After installing the TV, you can adjust the TV set  
manually to the left or right direction by 20  
degrees to suit your viewing position.  
10 cm  
10 cm  
10 cm  
10 cm  
A-40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CAREFUL INSTALLATION  
ADVICE  
KENSINGTON SECURITY  
SYSTEM  
You should purchase necessary components  
to fix the TV safety and secure to the wall on  
the market.  
This feature is not available for all models.  
Image shown may differ from your TV.  
Position the TV close to the wall to avoid the  
The TV is equipped with a Kensington Security  
System connector on the back panel. Connect  
the Kensington Security System cable as shown  
below.  
For the detailed installation and use of the  
Kensington Security System, refer to the user’s  
guide provided with the Kensington Security  
System.  
For further information, contact http://www.kens-  
ington.com, the internet homepage of the  
Kensington  
company. Kensington sells security systems for  
expensive electronic equipment such as note-  
book PCs and LCD projectors.  
possibility of it falling when pushed.  
The instructions shown below are a safer way  
to set up the TV, by fixing it to the wall, avoid-  
ing the possibility of it falling forwards if pulled.  
This will prevent the TV from falling forward  
and causing injury. This will also prevent the  
TV from damage. Ensure that children do not  
climb or hang from the TV.  
1
1
2
2
NOTE  
Use the eye-bolts or TV brackets/bolts to fix  
the product to the wall as shown in the pic-  
ture.  
(If your TV has bolts in the eyebolts, loosen  
then bolts.)  
* Insert the eye-bolts or TV brackets/bolts and  
tighten them securely in the upper holes.  
1
The Kensington Security System is an  
optional accessory.  
If the TV feels cold to the touch, there may  
be a small “flicker” when it is turned on.  
This is normal, there is nothing wrong with  
TV.  
Some minute dot defects may be visible on  
the screen, appearing as tiny red, green, or  
blue spots. However, they have no adverse  
effect on the monitor's performance.  
Secure the wall brackets with the bolts on  
2
the wall. Match the height of the bracket  
that is mounted on the wall.  
Avoid touching the LCD screen or holding  
your finger(s) against it for long periods of  
time. Doing so may produce some temporary  
distortion effects on the screen.  
3
Use a sturdy rope to tie the product for  
3
alignment. It is safer to tie the rope so it  
becomes horizontal between the wall and  
the product.  
NOTE  
When moving the TV undo the cords first.  
Use a platform or cabinet strong and large  
enough to support the size and weight of the  
TV.  
To use the TV safely make sure that the  
height of the bracket on the wall and on the  
TV is the same.  
A-41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PREPARATION  
The TV can be installed in various ways such as  
10 cm  
on a wall, or on a desktop etc.  
10 cm  
The TV is designed to be mounted horizontally.  
10 cm  
10 cm  
EARTHING  
Ensure that you connect the earth wire to prevent  
possible electric shock. If grounding methods are  
not possible, have a qualified electrician install a  
separate circuit breaker.  
10 cm  
Do not try to earth the TV by connecting it to tele-  
phone wires, lightening rods or gas pipes.  
Power  
Supply  
Circuit  
breaker  
Standard  
Screw  
VESA  
(A B)  
*
Model  
Quantity  
WALL MOUNT: HORIZONTAL  
INSTALLATION  
19/22/26LE3  
100 100  
M4  
M4  
M4  
M6  
M4  
M4  
M6  
M6  
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
***  
***  
*
32LE3  
***  
200 100  
*
32LE4  
200 100  
***  
*
We recommend the use of a LG Brand wall  
37/42LE4  
200 200  
*
***  
mounting bracket when mounting the TV to a wall.  
We recommend that you purchase a wall mount-  
ing bracket which supports VESA standard.  
LG recommends that wall mounting be per-  
22/26LE5  
32LE5  
100 100  
***  
***  
*
200 100  
*
37/42/47LE5  
200 200  
*
55LE5  
***  
400 400  
*
formed by a qualified professional installer.  
NOTE  
< Only 26LE3  
***,  
26LE5  
***  
>
Should Install wall mount on a solid wall per-  
Image shown may differ from your TV.  
pendicular to the floor.  
Should use a special wall mount, if you want  
to install it to ceiling or slanted wall.  
The surface that wall mount is to be mount-  
ed on should be of sufficient strength to sup-  
port the weight of TV set; e.g. concrete, nat-  
ural rock, brick and hollow block.  
Installing screw type and length depends on  
the wall mount used. Further information,  
refer to the instructions included with the  
mount.  
4-Ring spacers  
LG is not liable for any accidents or damage  
to property or TV due to incorrect installa-  
tion:  
Place the ring spacers on the set before  
installing the wall mounting bracket so that  
the inclination of the backside of the set can  
be adjusted perpendicularly.  
- Where a non-compliant VESA wall mount  
is used.  
- Incorrect fastening of screws to surface  
which may cause TV to fall and cause per-  
sonal injury.  
- Not following the recommended Installation  
method.  
A-42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
REMOTE CONTROL KEY FUNCTIONS  
When using the remote control, aim it at the remote control sensor on the TV.  
Image shown may differ from your TV.  
Switches the TV on from standby or off to standby.  
(POWER)  
Adjust the Energy Saving mode of the TV.(p.95)  
ENERGY  
SAVING  
It helps you select and set images and sounds  
when connecting AV devices.(p.50)  
AV MODE  
External input mode rotate in regular sequence.  
(►  
INPUT  
p.43  
)
Selects Radio, TV and DTV channel.  
TV/RAD  
0 to 9 number Selects a programme.  
button  
Selects numbered items in a menu.  
LIST Displays the programme table.  
p.41)  
(►  
Q.VIEW Returns to the previously viewed programme.  
MENU  
Selects a menu.  
Clears all on-screen displays and returns to TV  
viewing from any menu.  
(►  
p.19  
)
GUIDE  
Shows programme guide.  
(►  
p.86  
)
Q. MENU  
Select the desired quick menu source. (Aspect  
Ratio, Clear Voice II , Picture Mode, Sound Mode,  
Audio (or Audio Language), Sleep Timer, Skip Off/  
On, USB Device).(p.18)  
Allows the user to move return one step in an inter-  
active application, EPG or other user interaction  
function.  
BACK  
Clears all on-screen displays and returns to TV  
viewing from any menu.  
EXIT  
Shows the present screen information.  
INFO i  
Allows you to navigate the on-screen menus and  
adjust the system settings to your preference.  
THUMBSTICK  
(Up/Down/Left/Right)  
1
Accepts your selection or displays the current  
mode.  
OK  
Coloured These buttons are used for teletext (on TELETEXT  
buttons  
models only), Programme edit.  
1
TELETEXT These buttons are used for teletext.  
BUTTONS  
For further details, see the ‘Teletext’ section.(►  
p.130)  
1
SUBTITLE Recalls your preferred subtitle in digital mode.  
A-43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PREPARATION  
VOLUME UP Adjusts the volume.  
/DOWN  
FAV Displays the selected favourite programme.  
MARK  
Select the input to apply the Picture Wizard  
settings.  
Check and un-check programmes in the USB  
menu.  
RATIO  
Selects your desired Aspect Ratio of picture.  
(p.92)  
MUTE Switches the sound on or off.  
Programme  
UP/DOWN  
Selects a programme.  
PAGE UP/  
DOWN  
Move from one full set of screen information to the  
next one.  
2
Controls SIMPLINK or MY MEDIA menu(Photo List  
and Music List or Movie List).  
SIMPLINK /  
MY MEDIA Menu  
control buttons  
See a list of AV devices connected to TV.  
When you toggle this button, the Simplink menu  
appears at the screen.(p.46)  
Switches the Audio Description On or Off.  
AD  
Installing Batteries  
2
Open the battery compartment cover on the back and install  
the batteries matching correct polarity (+with +,-with -).  
Install two 1.5 V AAA batteries. Do not mix old or used batter-  
ies with new ones.  
Close cover.  
To remove the batteries, perform the installation actions in  
2
reverse.  
A-44  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP  
To prevent damage do not connect to the mains outlet until all connections are made between the  
devices.  
ANTENNA CONNECTION  
For optimum picture quality, adjust antenna direction.  
An antenna cable and converter are not supplied.  
Multi-family Dwellings/Apartments  
Wall  
Antenna  
Socket  
(Connect to wall antenna socket)  
RF Coaxial Wire (75 Ω)  
Outdoor  
Antenna  
Single-family Dwellings /Houses  
(VHF, UHF)  
(Connect to wall jack for outdoor antenna)  
UHF  
Antenna  
Signal  
Amplifier  
VHF  
In poor signal areas, to achieve better picture quality it may be necessary to install a signal amplifier  
to the antenna as shown above.  
If signal needs to be split for two TVs,use an antenna signal splitter for connection.  
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP  
To avoid damaging any equipment, never plug in any power cord until you have finished connecting  
all equipment.  
This section on EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP mainly uses diagrams for the 32/37/42/47LD4  
***  
models.  
Image shown may differ from your TV.  
CONNECTING WITH A COMPONENT CABLE  
This TV can receive Digital RF/Cable signals without an external digital set-top box. However, if you do  
receive Digital signals from a digital set-top box or other digital external device, refer to the diagram as  
shown below.  
(
)
Connect the video outputs Y, PB, PR of the  
external equipment (digital set-top box, DVD,  
etc.) to the COMPONENT IN VIDEO jacks on  
the TV.  
1
1
Connect the audio output of the external equip-  
ment (digital set-top box, DVD, etc.) to the  
COMPONENT IN AUDIO jacks on the TV.  
2
3
4
2
Turn on the external equipment.  
(
Refer to the external equipment's manual for  
operating instructions.)  
Select the Component input source using the  
INPUT button on the remote control.  
or  
HDMI Audio Supported format : Dolby Digital, PCM  
DTS Audio format is not supported.  
1
Signal  
Component  
HDMI  
2
480i/576i  
480p/576p  
720p/1080i  
O
O
O
X
O
O
O
O
1080p  
(24 Hz / 30 Hz /  
50 Hz / 60 Hz)  
(50 Hz / 60 Hz only)  
Component Input ports  
To achieve better picture quality, connect a DVD player to the component input ports as shown below.  
Component ports on the TV  
Y
P
B
B
P
P
R
R
Y
Y
Y
Y
P
B-Y  
Cb  
Pb  
R-Y  
Cr  
Video output ports  
on DVD player  
Pr  
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
CONNECTING WITH AN HDMI CABLE  
Connect the HDMI output of the external equipment (digital set-  
1
top box, DVD, etc.) to HDMI/DVI IN 1, HDMI IN 2 (Except for  
19/22LD3 ), HDMI IN 3 (Except for 19/22/26/32LD3  
*** *** ***  
32LE3 , 32/37/42LE4 , 32/37/42/47/55LE5 ) jack on the  
*** *** ***  
,
***  
***  
32/37/42/47LD4 , 19/22LE3 , 22LE5 ) or HDMI IN 4 (Only  
TV.  
Turn on the external equipment.  
2
3
(
Refer to the external equipment's manual for operating instruc-  
tions.)  
Select HDMI1, HDMI2 (Except for 19/22LD3 ), HDMI3  
***  
(Except for 19/22/26/32LD3 , 32/37/42/47LD4  
,
***  
***  
1
19/22LE3 , 22LE5 ) or HDMI4 (Only 32LE3  
*** ***  
,
***  
32/37/42LE4 , 32/37/42/47/55LE5 ) input source using the  
*** ***  
INPUT button on the remote control.  
NOTE  
The TV can receive video and audio signals simultaneously when  
using an HDMI cable.  
If the DVD does not support Auto HDMI, you must set the output reso-  
lution appropriately.  
Check that your HDMI cable is High Speed HDMI Cable. If the HDMI  
cables are not High Speed HDMI Cable, flickering or no screen dis-  
play can result. Please use the High Speed HDMI Cable.  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP  
CONNECTING WITH AN HDMI TO DVI CABLE  
Connect the digital set-top box or the DVI out-  
put of the PC to HDMI/DVI IN 1 jack on the  
1
TV.  
Connect the audio output of the digital set-top  
box or the PC audio output to the AUDIO IN  
2
(RGB/DVI) jack on the TV.  
Turn on the digital set-top box or the PC and  
the TV.  
3
(
Refer to the digital set-top box or the PC  
1
2
manual for operating instructions.)  
Select HDMI1 input source using the INPUT  
button on the remote control.  
4
or  
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
CONNECTING WITH A EURO SCART CABLE  
Connect the Euro scart socket of the external  
equipment (DVD, VCR, etc.) to the AV1 Euro  
1
scart socket on the TV.  
Turn on the external equipment.  
2
(Refer to the external equipment's manual for  
operating instructions.)  
Select AV1 input source using the INPUT but-  
ton on the remote control.  
3
1
Input  
Audio  
O
Output  
Scart  
AV1  
Video  
RGB  
Video, Audio  
Analogue TV, Digital TV  
O
O
Output Type  
AV1  
AV1  
(TV Out)  
TV Out : Outputs Analogue TV  
(When DTV scheduled recording is in  
progress using recording equipment.)  
Current  
input model  
or Digital TV signals.  
Digital TV  
Digital TV  
O
O
Analogue TV, AV  
Component/RGB  
HDMI  
Analogue TV  
Analogue TV  
Analogue TV  
(The input mode is converted  
to DTV.)  
NOTE  
Any Euro scart cable used must be signal shielded.  
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP  
USB SETUP  
Connect the USB device to the USB IN jack  
on the TV.  
1
1
or  
After connecting the USB IN jack, you use the  
2
USB function. ( p.52)  
CONNECTING WITH A RF CABLE  
To avoid picture noise (interference), allow adequate distance between the VCR and TV.  
Connect the ANT OUT socket of the VCR to  
the ANTENNA IN socket on the TV.  
1
1
Connect the antenna cable to the ANT IN  
socket of the VCR.  
2
3
Press the PLAY button on the VCR and match  
the appropriate channel between the TV and  
VCR for viewing.  
Wall Jack  
Antenna  
2
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
CONNECTING WITH A RCA CABLE  
Connect the AUDIO/VIDEO jacks between TV  
and VCR or external equipment. Match the  
1
jack colours (Video = yellow, Audio Left =  
white, and Audio Right = red)  
1
Insert a video tape into the VCR and press  
2
(
PLAY on the VCR. Refer to the VCR owner’s  
)
manual.  
Or, Operate the corresponding external equip-  
ment.  
(Refer to external equipment operating guide.)  
or  
Select AV2 input source using the INPUT but-  
ton on the remote control.  
3
If connected to AV IN 3, select AV3 input  
source.  
Video Game Set  
NOTE  
Camcorder  
If you have a mono VCR, connect the audio cable  
from the VCR to the AUDIO L/MONO jack of the  
TV.  
or  
1
or  
Video Game Set  
Camcorder  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP  
CONNECTING WITH A D-SUB 15 PIN CABLE  
This TV provides Plug and Play capability, meaning that the PC adjusts automatically to the TV's set-  
tings.  
Connect the RGB output of the PC to the RGB  
IN (PC) jack on the TV.  
1
Connect the PC audio output to the AUDIO IN  
(RGB/DVI) jack on the TV.  
2
Turn on the PC and the TV  
3
Select RGB input source using the INPUT but-  
ton on the remote control.  
4
2
1
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
INSERTION OF CI MODULE  
To view the encrypted (pay) services in digital TV mode.  
This feature is not available in all countries.  
Insert the CI Module to PCMCIA (Personal  
Computer Memory Card International  
1
Association) CARD SLOT of TV as shown.  
For further information, see p.34.  
NOTE  
Check if the CI module is inserted into the PCMCIA card slot  
in the right direction. If the module is not inserted properly,  
this can cause damage to the TV and the PCMCIA card slot.  
Check this point as  
shown and insert the CI  
Module.  
HEADPHONE SETUP  
You can listen the sound through the headphone.  
Plug the headphone into the headphone socket.  
1
To adjust the headphone volume, press the  
+ or - button. If you press the MUTE button,  
the sound from the headphone is switched off.  
2
NOTE  
AUDIO menu items are disabled when connecting a headphone.  
When changing AV MODE with a headphone connected, the change is applied to video but not to audio.  
Optical Digital Audio Out is not available when connecting a headphone.  
Headphone impedance: 16 Ω  
Max audio output of headphone: 10 mW to 15 mW  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP  
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT SETUP  
Sending the TV’s audio signal to external audio equipment via the Digital Audio Output (Optical) port.  
If you want to enjoy digital broadcasting through 5.1-channel speakers, connect the OPTICAL  
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT terminal on the back of TV to a Home Theater (or amp).  
Connect one end of an optical cable to the TV  
1
(
)
Digital Audio Optical Output port.  
Connect the other end of the optical cable to  
2
3
(
)
the digital audio Optical input on the audio  
equipment.  
Set the “TV Speaker option - Off ” in the  
1
2
AUDIO menu.( p.112). Refer to the external  
audio equipment instruction manual for opera-  
tion.  
CAUTION  
Do not look into the optical output port. Looking at the laser  
beam may damage your vision.  
10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT WIRELESS CONNECTION  
(Only 32/42/46/52/60LD5 , 32LE3 , 32/37/42LE4 , 32/37/42/47/55LE5 )  
*** *** *** ***  
You can connect between TV and external equipment wirelessly.  
For further information, refer to the “LG Wireless Media Box” manual for operating instructions.  
Connect the Wireless Media Box to the  
1
WIRELESS CONTROL jack and HDMI/DVI IN  
1, HDMI IN 2 (Except for 19/22LD3 ), HDMI  
***  
IN 3 (Except for 19/22/26/32LD3  
,
***  
32/37/42/47LD4 , 19/22LE3 , 22LE5 ) or  
*** *** ***  
HDMI IN 4 (Only 32LE3 , 32/37/42LE4  
,
***  
***  
32/37/42/47/55LE5 ) jack on the TV.  
***  
LG Wireless Media Box  
11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP  
SUPPORTED DISPLAY RESOLUTION  
RGB-PC, HDMI/DVI-PC mode  
HDMI/DVI-DTV mode  
Horizontal  
Resolution  
Vertical  
Horizontal  
Vertical  
Resolution  
Frequency(kHz) Frequency(Hz)  
Frequency(kHz) Frequency(Hz)  
720x400  
640x480  
31.468  
31.469  
37.879  
48.363  
47.78  
70.08  
59.94  
60.31  
60.00  
59.87  
59.80  
60.02  
31.469  
31.5  
59.94  
60  
720x480  
720x576  
1280x720  
800x600  
31.25  
50  
1024x768  
1280x768  
1360x768  
1280x1024  
1920x1080  
(RGB-PC)  
1920x1080  
(HDMI-PC)  
37.5  
50  
44.96/45  
33.72/33.75  
28.125  
59.94/60  
59.94/60  
50  
47.72  
63.981  
26.97/27  
33.716/33.75  
56.25  
23.97/24  
29.976/30.00  
50  
66.587  
66.587  
59.93  
59.93  
1920x1080  
67.43/67.5  
59.94/60  
(Except for 19/22/26LD3 , 26/32LD32 , 32LD34 , 19/22/26/32LE3 , 26/32LD33  
*** ** ** ***  
)
**  
NOTE  
Connect the audio cable from the PC to the Audio  
input on the TV. (Audio cables are not included with  
the TV).  
Avoid keeping a fixed image on the set’s screen  
for prolonged periods of time. The fixed image  
may become permanently imprinted on the  
screen; use a screen saver when possible.  
If using a sound card, adjust PC sound as required.  
If the graphic card on the PC does not output ana-  
logue and digital RGB simultaneously, connect only  
one of either RGB or HDMI IN (or HDMI/DVI IN) to  
display the PC output on the TV.  
There may be interference relating to resolution,  
vertical pattern, contrast or brightness in PC  
mode. Change the PC mode to another resolution  
or change the refresh rate to another rate or  
adjust the brightness and contrast on the menu  
until the picture is clear. If the refresh rate of the  
PC graphic card can not be changed, change the  
PC graphic card or consult the manufacturer of  
the PC graphic card.  
If the graphic card on the PC does output analogue  
and digital RGB simultaneously, set the TV to either  
RGB or HDMI; (the other mode is set to Plug and  
Play automatically by the TV.)  
DOS mode may not work depending on the video  
card if you use an HDMI to DVI cable.  
The synchronization input waveform for Horizontal  
and Vertical frequencies are separate.  
If you use too long an RGB-PC cable, there may be  
interference on the screen. We recommend using  
under 5m of cable. This provides the best picture  
quality.  
We recommend using 1920x1080, 60 Hz(Except  
for 19/22/26LD3 , 26/32LD32 , 32LD34**,  
*** **  
19/22/26/32LE3 , 26/32LD33 ), 1360x768, 60  
*** **  
Hz(Only 19/22/26LD3 , 26/32LD32 , 32LD34**,  
*** **  
19/22/26/32LE3 , 26/32LD33 ) for the PC  
*** **  
mode, this should provide the best picture quality.  
Connect the signal cable from the monitor output  
port of the PC to the RGB (PC) port of the TV or  
the signal cable from the HDMI output port of the  
PC to the HDMI IN (or HDMI/DVI IN) port on the  
TV.  
12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SCREEN SETUP FOR PC MODE  
Screen Reset  
Returns Position, Size and Phase to the factory default settings.  
This function works in the following mode : RGB[PC].  
Move  
Prev.  
SCREEN  
PICTURE  
Move  
OK  
Resolution  
Sh
arpness  
• Colour  
70  
60  
0
Auto Config.  
Position  
Size  
R
G
C
• Tint  
W
• Colour Temp.  
0
To Set  
• Advanced Control  
• Picture Reset  
Yes  
No  
• TruMotion  
Phase  
• Screen  
Reset  
1
2
3
4
Select PICTURE.  
Select Screen.  
Select Reset.  
Select Yes.  
5
Run Reset.  
Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.  
Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.  
13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP  
Auto Configure (RGB [PC] mode only)  
Automatically adjusts the picture position and minimizes image instability. After adjustment, if the  
image is still not correct, your TV is functioning properly but needs further adjustment.  
Auto configure  
This function is for automatic adjustment of the screen position, size, and phase The displayed image  
will be unstable for a few seconds while the auto configuration is in progress.  
Move  
Prev.  
SCREEN  
PICTURE  
Move  
OK  
Resolution  
• Sharpness  
• Colour  
70  
60  
0
Auto Config.  
Position  
Size  
R
G
C
• Tint  
W
• Colour Temp.  
0
Auto Config.  
• Advanced Control  
• Picture Reset  
Yes  
No  
• TruMotion  
Phase  
• Screen  
Reset  
1
2
3
4
If the position of the image is still not correct,  
try Auto adjustment again.  
Select PICTURE.  
If picture needs to be adjusted again after  
Auto adjustment in RGB (PC), you can adjust  
the Position, Size or Phase.  
Select Screen.  
Select Auto Config..  
Select Yes.  
5
Run Auto Config..  
Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.  
Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.  
14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Selecting Resolution  
To view a normal picture, match the resolution of RGB mode and selection of PC mode.  
This function works in the following mode: RGB[PC]  
Move  
Prev.  
SCREEN  
PICTURE  
Move  
OK  
1024 x 768  
Resolution  
Sh
arpness  
• Colour  
70  
60  
0
1280 x 768  
1360 x 768  
Auto Config.  
Position  
Size  
R
G
C
• Tint  
W
• Colour Temp.  
0
• Advanced Control  
• Picture Reset  
• TruMotion  
Phase  
• Screen  
Reset  
1
2
3
Select PICTURE.  
Select Screen.  
Select Resolution.  
4
5
Select the desired resolution.  
Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.  
Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.  
15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP  
Adjustment for screen Position, Size, Phase  
If the picture is not clear after auto adjustment and especially if characters are still trembling, adjust  
the picture position manually.  
This function works in the following mode : RGB[PC].  
Prev.  
Move  
SCREEN  
PICTURE  
Move  
OK  
Resolution  
• Sharpness  
• Colour  
70  
60  
0
Auto Config.  
Position  
Size  
R
G
C
• Tint  
W
• Colour Temp.  
0
• Advanced Control  
• Picture Reset  
Phase  
• TruMotion  
• Screen  
Reset  
1
2
3
Select PICTURE.  
Select Screen.  
Select Position, Size or Phase.  
4
5
Make appropriate adjustments.  
Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.  
Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.  
16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL  
TURNING ON THE TV  
When your TV is turned on, you will be able to use its features.  
Firstly, connect the power cord correctly.  
1
At this stage, the TV switches to standby mode.  
In standby mode to turn TV on, press the / I, INPUT or P  
(
or P  
)
button on the TV  
▲▼  
2
or press the POWER, INPUT, P  
or NUMBER button on the remote control and the TV  
will switch on.  
INITIALIZING SETUP  
If the OSD (On Screen Display) is displayed on the screen after turning on the TV, you can  
adjust the Language, Mode Setting, Power Indicator(When you select Home Use from  
Mode Setting - Only LED LCD TV MODELS), Country or TimeZone (When Russia is select-  
ed for Country) or Set Password(When France is selected for Country), Auto Tuning.  
1
Note:  
a.If you close without completing the initial setting, the Initial Setting menu can be displayed  
again.  
b.Press the BACK button to change the current OSD to the previous OSD.  
c.For those countries without confirmed DTV broadcasting standards, some DTV features might  
not work, depending on the DTV broadcasting environment.  
d."Home Use” mode is the optimal setting for home environments, and is the TV's default mode.  
e."Store Demo" mode is the optimal setting for store environments. If a user modifies image quality  
data, “Store Demo” mode initializes the product to the image quality set by us after a certain period  
of time.  
f. The mode (Home Use, Store Demo) can be changed by executing Mode Setting in the  
OPTION menu.  
g
. When France is selected for Country, password is not '0', '0', '0', '0' but ‘1’, ‘2’, ‘3’, ‘4’.  
PROGRAMME SELECTION  
Press the P  
or NUMBER buttons to select a programme number.  
1
VOLUME ADJUSTMENT  
Press the  
+ or - button to adjust the volume.  
1
If you wish to switch the sound off, press the MUTE button.  
2
You can cancel this function by pressing the MUTE,  
+ , - or AV Mode button.  
17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL  
QUICK MENU  
Your TV's OSD (On Screen Display) may differ slightly from that shown in this manual.  
Q.Menu (Quick Menu) is a menu of features which users might use frequently.  
Aspect Ratio: Selects your desired picture for-  
mat.  
Audio or Audio Language : Selects the sound  
output  
.
For Zoom Setting, select 14:9, Zoom and  
Cinema Zoom in Ratio Menu. After complet-  
ing Zoom Setting, the display goes back to  
Q.Menu.  
Sleep Timer : Sets the sleep timer.  
Skip Off/On : Selects the Skip Off/On.  
USB Device : Selects “Eject” in order to eject  
USB device.  
Clear Voice II : By differentiating the human  
sound range from others, it helps users lis-  
ten to human voices better.  
Picture Mode : Selects your desired Picture  
Mode.  
Sound Mode : It is a feature to automatical-  
ly set the sound combination which it deems  
the best for the images being watched.  
Selects your desired Sound Mode.  
Aspect Ratio  
16:9  
Exit  
1
2
3
Display each menu.  
Select your desired Source.  
Press the Q.MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.  
Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.  
18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
ON SCREEN MENUS SELECTION AND ADJUSTMENT  
Your TV's OSD (On Screen Display) may differ slightly from that shown in this manual.  
Move  
OK  
Move  
OK  
SETUP  
PICTURE  
AUDIO  
Move  
OK  
Auto Tuning  
Auto Volume  
: Off  
: Off  
Aspect Ratio  
: 16:9  
Manual Tuning  
Programme Edit  
CI Information  
Clear Voice II  
Balance  
3
Picture Wizard  
L
R
0
Energy Saving : Off  
Sound Mode  
: Standard  
Picture Mode  
: Standard  
• Infinite Sound : Off  
• Backlight  
• Contrast  
• Brightness  
70  
• Treble  
• Bass  
50  
50  
100  
50  
• Reset  
TIME  
LOCK  
Move  
OK  
Move  
OK  
Set Password  
Clock  
Lock System  
: Off  
Off Time  
On Time  
Sleep Timer  
: Off  
: Off  
: Off  
SETUP  
LOCK  
PICTURE  
OPTION  
AUDIO  
INPUT  
TIME  
Block Programme  
Parental Guidance: Blocking Off  
Input Block  
: Off  
Key Lock  
MY MEDIA  
Input List  
OPTION  
Move  
OK  
Move  
OK  
MY MEDIA  
Language(Language)  
Country  
: UK  
Antenna  
RGB  
USB  
AV1  
AV2  
AV3  
Component  
Disability Assistance  
Power Indicator  
Factory Reset  
Set ID  
Movie List  
Photo List  
Music List  
HDMI1  
HDMI2  
HDMI3  
HDMI4  
: 1  
: Home Use  
Mode Setting  
IR Blaster  
Press OK(  
) to see photos from the USB.  
Option  
Exit  
Input Label  
Exit  
(Except for 19/22/26/32LD3  
,
***  
32/37/42/47LD4 , 19/22/26LE3 , 22/26LE5  
)
*** *** ***  
1
2
3
• Press the RED button, you can check the  
Customer Support menu.  
Display each menu.  
Select a menu item.  
• Press the GREEN button, you can check  
the Simple Manual menu.  
Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to  
normal TV viewing.  
Move to the pop up menu.  
Press the BACK button to move to the pre-  
vious menu screen.  
NOTE  
It is not possible to use CI Information in Analogue mode.  
IR Blaster : For further information, refer to the optional “Wireless Media Box” manual for operat-  
ing instructions.  
It is possible to use Movie List menu in 19/22/26/32LE3***, 32/37/42LE4***, 22/26LE5***,  
32/37/42/47/55LE5***, 32/42/46/52/60LD56**, 32/37/42/47LD46**, 32/42/46/52/60LD555,  
19  
32/37/42/47LD425, 32/D3o7w/n4lo2a/d4f7roLmDW4w2w6.,So2m6a/n3u2aLls.Dco3m3. 5A,ll M2a6n/u3a2lsLSDea3r3ch6A.nd Download.  
 
WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL  
AUTO PROGRAMME TUNING  
Use this to automatically find and store all available programmes.  
When you start auto programming, all previously stored service information will be deleted.  
The maximum number of programmes that can be stored is 1,000. But the number may differ slightly  
depending on broadcasting signals.  
DVB-T, DVB-C Auto Tuning is a menu for users in countries that support DVB cable.  
If you want to select the Antenna,  
Move  
OK  
Move  
OK  
SETUP  
SETUP  
Please select your TV Connection.  
Antenna  
Auto Tuning  
Auto Tuning  
Manual Tuning  
Programme Edit  
CI Information  
Manual Tuning  
Programme Edit  
CI Information  
Antenna  
Cable  
Antenna  
Antenna  
Cable  
Check your antenna connection.  
The previous channel information  
will be updated during Auto Tuning.  
If you select antenna or cable,  
existing channel information is  
deleted.  
SECAM L Search  
Automatic Numbering  
Start  
Antenna  
Cable  
Close  
Close  
1
2
3
• Use NUMBER buttons to input a 4-digit  
password in Lock System On’.  
Select SETUP.  
• If you wish to keep on auto tuning select  
Start using the  
button. Then, press  
Select Auto Tuning.  
Select Antenna.  
the OK button. Otherwise select Close.  
Automatic Numbering: Decide whether  
to use the programme numbers as sent  
by broadcasting stations for tuning.  
• When select Italy in the County menu, If  
the pop up is displayed when the conflict-  
ed programme after Auto Tuning, select a  
broadcaster for Conflicting programme  
number to solve.  
4
5
Select Start.  
Run Auto tuning.  
Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.  
Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.  
• In the following country, DVB cable can be used : Germany, Netherlands, Sweden, Switzerland,  
Denmark, Austria, Finland, Norway, Slovenia, Hungary, Ukraine. (The supported country can be  
added.)  
• In the following country, Digital TV can not be used : Slovakia, Bosnia, Serbia, Bulgaria, Albania,  
Kazakhstan.  
20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
If you want to select the Cable,  
Move  
OK  
Move  
OK  
Move  
OK  
SETUP  
SETUP  
SETUP  
Please select your TV Connection.  
Service Operator  
Auto Tuning  
Auto Tuning  
Auto Tuning  
Manual Tuning  
Programme Edit  
CI Information  
Cable DTV Setting  
Manual Tuning  
Programme Edi
CI Information  
Manual Tuning  
Programme Edit  
CI Information  
Antenna  
Cable  
Comhem  
Other Operators  
Antenna  
Cable  
Cable DTV Sett
Cable DTV Setting  
Previous  
Next  
If you select antenna or cable,  
existing channel information is  
deleted.  
Antenna  
Cable  
Close  
1
2
3
• Use NUMBER buttons to input a 4-digit  
password in Lock System On’.  
Select SETUP.  
Select Auto Tuning.  
Select Cable.  
• When you select the Cable, the Cable  
Service Operator selection screen can  
differ or not exist by the Cable situation of  
the applicable country.  
• The popup window to select Service  
Operator is only shown initially for the 3  
cases when you accessing the Initial  
Setting menu, when you change from  
Antenna to Cable or when you access  
the menu after changing the Country.  
4
5
Select Comhem or Other  
Operators.  
• When you want to select Service Operator  
aside from the above 3 cases, you can do  
so by selecting Setup->Cable DTV  
Setting-> Service Operator.  
Select Quick or Full.  
Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.  
Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.  
• Acquired certification SO : Sweden(Comhem, Canal Digital), Denmark(YouSee, Canal Digital,  
Stofa), Norway(Canal Digital), Netherlands(Ziggo), Ukraine(Volia-Cable)  
• If there are not any Service Operator that you want, select Other Operators.  
• If you select “Other Operators”, or the selected country supports “Other Operators” only, it may  
take some time to search all the channels, or it may not search some of the channels.  
If some of the channels do not appear, follow the steps below:  
1. SETUP -> Auto Tuning -> Cable -> Setting  
2. Switch Home Tuning from "Off" to "On"  
3. Input additional values such as the frequency, symbol rate, modulation, and network ID.  
(You can ask your cable service provider for the above information.)  
21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL  
When you select the Quick,  
Cable  
Home Tuning  
Quick  
Start Frequency(kHz) : 114000  
On  
Quick  
Frequency(kHz)  
Symbol rate(kS/s)  
Modulation  
Start Frequency(kHz) : 114000  
362000  
6900  
Cable  
End Frequency(kHz)  
Network  
: 862000  
: Auto  
End Frequency(kHz)  
Network  
: 862000  
: Auto  
Check your antenna connection. The  
previous channel information will be  
updated during Auto Tuning.  
640QAM  
Network ID  
Auto  
0
Skip Scramble Programme  
Automatic Numbering  
Setting  
Setting  
OK  
OK  
Start  
Start Frequency(kHz)  
End Frequency(kHz)  
114000  
862000  
Close  
Close  
Close  
Reset  
Close  
6
If you wish to keep on auto tuning, select  
Start using the button. Then, press  
Select Quick.  
the OK button. Otherwise select Close.  
7
Automatic Numbering: Decide whether  
to use the programme numbers as sent  
by broadcasting stations for tuning.  
Select Setting.  
8
Make appropriate  
adjustments.  
Skip Scramble Programme : Scramble  
Programme is skipped in Auto Tuning  
and Manual Tuning.  
9
Select Close.  
10  
11  
12  
Select OK.  
Select Start.  
Run Auto tuning.  
Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.  
Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.  
22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
When you select the Full,  
Cable  
Full  
Search every available signal.  
Cable  
Check your antenna connection.  
The previous channel information  
will be updated during Auto Tuning.  
Skip Scramble Programme  
Automatic Numbering  
OK  
Start  
Close  
Close  
6
If you wish to keep on auto tuning, select  
Start using the button. Then, press  
Select Full.  
the OK button. Otherwise select Close.  
7
Automatic Numbering: Decide whether  
to use the programme numbers as sent  
by broadcasting stations for tuning.  
Select OK.  
8
Skip Scramble Programme : Scramble  
Programme is skipped in Auto Tuning  
and Manual Tuning.  
Select Start.  
9
You can not select the Full when the service  
operator is set to "Ziggo" or "Other  
Operators" of Netherlands.  
Run Auto tuning.  
Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.  
Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.  
23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL  
The following values are needed in order to search all available programmes quickly and correctly.  
The commonly used values are provided as "default".  
However, for correct settings, please inquire of the cable service provider.  
When running Auto Tuning in DVB cable mode, selecting Full will search through all frequencies to  
find available channels.  
In the case when the programme is not searched by selecting the Default, perform the searching by  
selecting the Full.  
However, in the case when the programme is searched by selecting the Full, the Auto Tuning time can be  
taken too much.  
Frequency : Enter a user-defined frequency.  
Symbol rate : Enter a user-defined symbol rate (Symbol rate: Speed at which a device such as  
modem sends symbols to a channel).  
Modulation : Enter a user-defined modulation. (Modulation: Loading of audio or video signals onto carrier).  
Network ID : Unique identifier allocated for each user.  
: Enter a user-defined start frequency range.  
: Enter a user-defined end frequency range.  
Start Frequency  
End Frequency  
24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CABLE DTV SETTING  
(IN CABLE MODE ONLY)  
The range that a user can select from the Service Operator menu differs depending on number of  
Service Operator supported by each country, and if number of supported Service Operator for each  
country is 1, corresponding function becomes non-activation.  
After changing Service Operator, a warning window saying that channel map will be deleted when OK  
button is pressed or Close is selected, and a Auto-tuning pop-up window appears when ‘YES’ is  
selected.  
Move  
OK  
Move  
OK  
SETUP  
SETUP  
Auto Tuning  
Auto Tuning  
Manual Tuning  
Programme Edit  
CI Information  
Manual Tuning  
Programme Edit  
CI Information  
Service Operator  
Comhem  
Off  
Channel Auto Update  
Cable DTV Setting  
Cable DTV Setting  
Close  
If you select Cable, you can see Cable  
DTV Setting menu.  
1
2
3
Select SETUP.  
When Channel Auto Update is On, you  
can update information for all the pro-  
grammes that can be updated, including  
the programme currently being watched.  
Select Cable DTV Setting.  
Select Service Operator or Channel  
Auto Update.  
When Channel Auto Update is Off, you  
can only update information for the pro-  
gramme currently being watched.  
4
You can not select the Cable DTV  
Setting when the service operator is set  
to "Ziggo".  
Select your desired Source.  
Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.  
Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.  
25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL  
MANUAL PROGRAMME TUNING  
(IN DIGITAL MODE)  
Manual Tuning lets you manually add a programme to your programme list.  
If you want to select the Antenna,  
Move  
OK  
SETUP  
SETUP  
DTV  
Auto Tuning  
Auto Tuning  
UHF CH.  
30  
474000  
Manual Tuning  
Programme Edit  
CI Information  
Manual Tuning  
Programme Edit  
CI Information  
Frequency(kHz)  
Signal Strength  
50%  
Signal Quality  
50%  
Add  
Close  
1
2
3
Select SETUP.  
Use NUMBER buttons to input a 4-digit  
password in Lock System On’.  
You can select SBAND when the country is set  
Select Manual Tuning.  
to "Norway, Latvia."  
Select DTV.  
4
5
Select the desired channel number.  
Select update or add if signal present.  
Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.  
Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.  
26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
If you want to select the Cable,  
Move  
OK  
SETUP  
SETUP  
Cable DTV  
Frequency(kHz)  
Symbol rate(kS/s)  
Modulation  
Auto Tuning  
Auto Tuning  
362000  
Manual Tuning  
Programme Edit  
CI Information  
Manual Tuning  
Programme Edit  
CI Information  
6875  
64QAM  
Cable DTV Setting  
Cable DTV Setting  
Signal Strength  
50%  
Signal Quality  
50%  
Add  
Close  
1
2
3
• Use NUMBER buttons to input a 4-digit  
password in Lock System On’.  
Select SETUP.  
Symbol rate : Enter a user-defined  
symbol rate (Symbol rate: Speed at  
which a device such as modem sends  
symbols to a channel).  
Modulation : Enter a user-defined  
modulation. (Modulation: Loading of  
audio or video signals onto carrier).  
Select Manual Tuning.  
Select Cable DTV.  
4
You can not select the Cable DTV  
when the service operator is set to  
"Ziggo" or "Other Operators" of  
Netherlands.  
Make appropriate adjustments.  
Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.  
Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.  
27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL  
MANUAL PROGRAMME TUNING  
(IN ANALOGUE MODE)  
Manual Tuning lets you manually tune and arrange the stations in whatever order you desire.  
Move  
OK  
Move  
OK  
SETUP  
SETUP  
Auto Tuning  
Auto Tuning  
TV  
Manual Tuning  
Programme Edit  
CI Information  
Manual Tuning  
Programme Edit  
CI Information  
Cable  
TV  
Storage  
System  
Band  
3
Storage  
System  
Band  
3
BG  
BG  
V/UHF  
V/UHF  
or  
Channel  
Fine  
0
Channel  
0
◄ ►  
Fine  
◄ ►  
Search  
Name  
◄ ►  
Search  
Name  
◄ ►  
C 02  
C 02  
Store  
Close  
Store  
Close  
1
2
3
6
Select V/UHF or Cable.  
Select SETUP.  
7
8
9
Select the desired  
channel number.  
or  
Select Manual Tuning.  
Select TV or Cable TV.  
Commence searching.  
Select the desired  
programme  
Select Store.  
4
5
or  
number on.  
Select a TV system.  
Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.  
Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.  
Use NUMBER buttons to input a 4-digit password in Lock System On’.  
L : SECAM L/L’ (France)  
BG : PAL B/G, SECAM B/G (Europe / East Europe / Asia / New Zealand / M.East / Africa)  
I : PAL I (U.K. / Ireland / Hong Kong / South Africa)  
DK : PAL D/K, SECAM D/K (East Europe / China / Africa / CIS)  
To store another channel, repeat steps 4 to 9.  
28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Move  
OK  
Move  
OK  
SETUP  
SETUP  
Auto Tuning  
Auto Tuning  
Cable  
TV  
TV  
Manual Tuning  
Programme Edit  
CI Information  
Manual Tuning  
Programme Edit  
CI Information  
Storage  
System  
Band  
Storage  
System  
Band  
3
3
BG  
BG  
V/UHF  
V/UHF  
or  
Channel  
Fine  
Channel  
0
0
Fine  
◄ ►  
◄ ►  
Search  
Name  
Search  
Name  
◄ ►  
◄ ►  
C 02  
C 02  
Store  
Close  
Store  
Close  
Assigning a station name  
You can assign a station name with five characters to each programme number.  
Select the position and make  
your choice of the second  
character, and so on.  
1
2
3
Select SETUP.  
5
You can use an the alphabet  
A to Z, the number 0 to 9, +/  
-, and blank.  
Select Manual Tuning.  
Select TV or Cable TV.  
Select Name.  
6
7
Select Close.  
4
Select Store.  
Fine Tuning  
Normally fine tuning is only necessary if reception is poor.  
1
2
3
4
5
6
Select SETUP.  
Select Fine.  
Select Manual Tuning.  
Fine tune for the best picture  
and sound.  
Select TV or Cable TV.  
Select Store.  
Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.  
Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.  
29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL  
PROGRAMME EDIT  
When a programme number is skipped, it means that you will be unable to select it using P  
during TV viewing.  
button  
If you wish to select the skipped programme, directly enter the programme number with the NUMBER  
buttons or select it in the Programme edit menu.  
This function enables you to skip the stored programmes.  
You can change the programme number using “Move”function, if “Automatic Numbering” is unchecked  
when you start Auto Tuning.  
Page 1/2  
A
Favourite Group :  
DTV  
Programme Edit  
RADIO  
TV  
Move  
OK  
SETUP  
801 YLE TV2  
804 YLE Teema  
807 CNN  
802 YLE FST  
805 TV4 Stockholm  
808 TV4  
800 YLE TV1  
803 YLE24  
Auto Tuning  
Manual Tuning  
806 Kanal Lokal  
809 TV4 Plus  
812 TV4 Fakta  
815 Demo  
ProgrammeEdit  
CI Information  
810 TV400  
813 MediaCorp HD5  
816 TVE 1  
819 CLAN/50 TVE  
811 TV4 Film  
814 SNY_SSU  
817 TVE 2  
818 24H TVE  
820 LA7  
Pr. Change  
FAV  
Q.MENU  
Previous  
Skip  
Favourite Pr.  
Favourite Pr. Group  
Block/Unblock  
P
Page Change  
or  
Page 1/2  
A
Favourite Group :  
Programme Edit  
Cable DTV  
Cable Radio  
Cable TV  
801 YLE TV2  
804 YLE Teema  
807 CNN  
802 YLE FST  
800 YLE TV1  
803 YLE24  
805 TV4 Stockholm  
808 TV4  
806 Kanal Lokal  
809 TV4 Plus  
812 TV4 Fakta  
815 Demo  
810 TV400  
813 MediaCorp HD5  
816 TVE 1  
819 CLAN/50 TVE  
811 TV4 Film  
814 SNY_SSU  
817 TVE 2  
818 24H TVE  
820 LA7  
Pr. Change  
FAV  
Q.MENU  
Previous  
Skip  
Favourite Pr.  
Favourite Pr. Group  
Block/Unblock  
P
Page Change  
1
2
3
4
Select SETUP.  
Select Programme Edit.  
Enter the Programme Edit.  
Select a programme to be stored or  
skipped.  
Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.  
Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.  
30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
IN DTV/RADIO MODE  
Skipping a programme number  
• When programmes are to be skipped, the  
skipped programme shows in blue and  
these programmes will not be selected by  
1
Select a programme number to be skipped.  
the P  
buttons during TV viewing.  
2
• If you wish to select a skipped programme,  
directly enter the programme number with  
the NUMBER buttons or select it in the  
programme edit or EPG.  
Turn the programme number to blue.  
Release.  
BLUE  
3
BLUE  
Locking a programme number  
• It can be registered as Lock  
programme even when Lock  
System is turned Off.  
1
Select a programme number to be locked.  
2
Turn the programme number to yellow.  
Release.  
YELLOW  
3
YELLOW  
IN TV MODE  
This function enables you to delete or skip the stored programmes.  
You can also move some channels and use other programme numbers.  
Deleting a programme  
1
Select a programme number to be deleted.  
2
Turn the programme number to red.  
The selected programme is deleted, all the  
following programmes are shifted up one  
RED  
Moving a programme  
1
3
Select a programme number to be moved.  
Release.  
GREEN  
2
Turn the programme number to  
green.  
GREEN  
31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL  
Skipping a programme number  
• When a programme number is skipped it  
means that you will be unable to select it  
1
Select a programme number to be skipped.  
Turn the programme number to blue.  
Release.  
using the P  
button during normal TV  
viewing.  
2
• If you wish to select a skipped programme,  
directly enter the programme number with  
the NUMBER buttons or select it in the  
programme edit or EPG.  
BLUE  
3
BLUE  
Auto Sort  
• After activating Auto Sort once, you can no  
longer edit programmes.  
1
Start Auto Sort.  
Locking a programme number  
• It can be registered as Lock  
programme even when Lock  
System is turned Off.  
1
Select a programme number to be locked.  
2
Turn the programme number to yellow.  
Release.  
YELLOW  
3
YELLOW  
Selecting favourite programme  
Favourite programmes is a convenient feature that lets you quickly scan up to programmes of your  
choice without having to wait for the TV to scan through all the in-between programmes.  
1
Select your desired programme.  
2
Add corresponding programme to Favourite  
list of current Favourite group.  
3
Release.  
32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Selecting favourite programme group  
1
Select your desired programme.  
2
Display a pop-up window where  
Favourite group can be changed.  
3
Select a Favourite group.  
33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL  
CI [COMMON INTERFACE] INFORMATION  
This function enables you to watch some encrypted services (pay services). If you remove the CI  
Module, you cannot watch pay services.  
When the module is inserted into the CI slot, you can access the module menu.  
To purchase a module and smart card, contact your dealer. Do not repeatedly insert or remove a CI  
module from the TV. This may cause a malfunction. When the TV is turned on after inserting a CI  
Module, you may not have any sound output.  
This may be incompatible with the CI module and smart card.  
CI (Common Interface) functions may not be possible depending upon the country broadcasting cir-  
cumstances.  
When using a CAM(Conditional Access Module), please make sure it meets fully the requirements of  
either DVB-CI or CI plus.  
i
Viaccess Module  
Move  
OK  
SETUP  
Consultations  
Auto Tuning  
Authorizations  
Manual Tuning  
Module information  
Programme Edit  
CI Information  
Select the item  
• This OSD is only for illustration and the menu  
options and screen format will vary according to  
the Digital pay services provider.  
• It is possible for you to change CI (Common  
Interface) menu screen and service by consult-  
ing your dealer.  
1
2
3
4
Select SETUP.  
Select CI Information.  
Select the desired item: Module information, smart card  
information, language, or software download etc.  
Save.  
Press the BACK/EXIT button to move to the previous menu screen.  
34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SOFTWARE UPDATE  
Software Update means software can be downloaded through the digital terrestrial broadcasting system.  
Software Update  
On  
Software Update  
Picture Test  
Current Version  
Sound Test  
SETUP  
LOCK  
PICTURE  
AUDIO  
INPUT  
TIME  
00.00.01  
Signal Test  
Product/Service Info.  
Close  
Close  
MY MEDIA  
OPTION  
Press OK(  
) to set programme settings.  
Simple Manual  
Exit  
Customer Support  
1
2
Select Customer Support.  
RED  
Select Software Update.  
Select On or Off.  
3
4
• If you select On, a user confirm message box will  
be displayed to notify that new software is found.  
Save.  
Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.  
Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.  
35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL  
When setting “Software Update”  
Occasionally, a transmission of  
updated digital software infor-  
mation will result in the following  
menu on the TV screen.  
Download starts when "Yes" is  
selected. At this time, pro-  
gressing pop-up window does  
not display.  
A window as display below  
appears when download  
completes.  
TV is restarted when "Yes" is  
selected.  
Download progress status can  
be checked from Software  
Update menu.  
Software update is available.  
?
Would you like to download now?  
New software version is ready. If you want  
to install now, TV will be turned off and  
restart. Continue?  
Yes  
No  
Software Update  
On  
Yes  
No  
Software downloading progress.  
Ver. 00.00.01 Ver.00.00.00  
Simple Update : for current  
update stream  
4%  
Close  
A new software update is available at  
00/00/0 00:00.  
?
Do you want to update the software when  
available?  
Yes  
No  
Schedule Update : for scheduled  
update stream  
When the Software Update menu  
is "Off", the message to change it  
to "On" appears.  
- During Progress of a Software Update, please note the following:  
• Power to the TV must not be interrupted.  
• The antenna must not be disconnected.  
• After Software Update, you can confirm the updated software version in Software Update menu.  
• It may take hours to download the software, so make sure that the power stays on during the download.  
• The software is downloaded only in Standby mode or in MUX with Software Update Service, and stops  
when the power cord is unplugged or when viewing MUX without Software Update Service.  
• When you return to Standby mode or MUX with Software Update Service, the software download will  
resume from where it stopped.  
36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PICTURE/SOUND TEST  
This function is a customer support function that can execute picture and sound tests.  
Software Update  
Do you have a problem in this test  
screen?  
Picture Test  
?
SETUP  
LOCK  
PICTURE  
AUDIO  
INPUT  
TIME  
Sound Test  
Signal Test  
Yes  
No  
Product/Service Info.  
Close  
MY MEDIA  
OPTION  
Press OK(  
) to set programme settings.  
Simple Manual  
Exit  
Customer Support  
1
2
3
Select Customer Support.  
RED  
Select Picture Test or Sound Test.  
Select Yes or No.  
Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.  
Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.  
37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL  
DIAGNOSTICS  
This function enables you to view information on the Manufacturer, Model/Type, Serial Number and  
Software Version.  
This displays the information and signal strength of the tuned *MUX.  
This displays the signal information and service name of the selected MUX.  
(*MUX: A higher directory of channels in digital broadcasting (a single MUX contains multiple chan-  
nels.))  
Engineering Diagnostics  
Manufacturer : LG Electronics Inc.  
Software Update  
Picture Test  
Model/Type : 42LD450-ZA  
Serial No. : SKJY1107  
Software Version : V00.00.01  
SETUP  
LOCK  
PICTURE  
AUDIO  
INPUT  
TIME  
Sound Test  
Ch 30  
Ch 34  
Ch 36  
Ch 38  
Ch 54  
Ch 60  
Signal Test  
Product/Service Info.  
Close  
MY MEDIA  
OPTION  
Press OK(  
) to set programme settings.  
MENU  
Prev.  
Exit  
Popup  
Simple Manual  
Exit  
Customer Support  
1
2
3
4
Select Customer Support.  
RED  
Select Signal Test.  
Display Manufacturer, Model/Type, Serial Number and  
Software Version.  
Display the information of Channel.  
Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.  
Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.  
38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
PRODUCT/SERVICE INFORMATION  
This function is a customer support function that can see product/service information and customer service center  
information.  
Software Update  
Picture Test  
SETUP  
LOCK  
PICTURE  
AUDIO  
INPUT  
TIME  
Sound Test  
Signal Test  
Product/Service Info.  
Close  
MY MEDIA  
OPTION  
Press OK(  
) to set programme settings.  
Simple Manual  
Exit  
Customer Support  
1
2
3
Select Customer Support.  
RED  
Select Product/Service Info..  
Display MODEL/TYPE, Software version, Serial Number,  
Customer service center and Homepage.  
Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.  
Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.  
39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL  
SIMPLE MANUAL  
You can easily and effectively access the TV information by viewing a simple manual on the TV.  
During the Simple Manual operation, audio will be muted.  
Image shown may differ from your TV.  
SETUP  
LOCK  
PICTURE  
AUDIO  
INPUT  
TIME  
MY MEDIA  
OPTION  
Press OK(  
) to set programme settings.  
Simple Manual  
Exit  
Customer Support  
RED : Go to the Index page.  
1
2
BLUE : Play the Simple Manual automatically  
Select Simple Manual.  
GREEN  
or manually.  
Select the part of the manual you want to see.  
Press the EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.  
40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SELECTING THE PROGRAMME LIST  
You can check which programmes are stored in the memory by displaying the programme list.  
Exit  
Programme List  
Mini Glossary  
Displayed when the  
1 BBC  
Locked Programme.  
2 BBC  
3 BBC  
4 BBC  
A
5 BBC  
Pr.Edit  
You may find some blue programmes.  
Displaying programme LIST  
These have been set up to be skipped by  
auto programming or in the programme  
edit mode.  
1
Display the Programme List.  
Some programmes with the channel num-  
ber shown in the programme LIST indicate  
there is no station name assigned.  
BLUE  
Turn the programme edit.  
Selecting a programme in the programme list  
The mode will be switched  
between TV, DTV, and Radio  
from the program you are cur-  
rently watching.  
1
Select a programme.  
2
Switch to the chosen programme number.  
41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL  
Paging through a programme list  
1
2
Return to normal TV viewing.  
Turn the pages.  
Displaying the favourite programme list  
Exit  
Favourite List  
Favourite Pr. Group  
Group  
B
1 BBC  
2 BBC  
3 BBC  
Pr.Reg.  
Pr.Edit  
BLUE  
Turn the programme edit.  
1
Display the Favourite Programme List.  
Current channel is registered/  
cancelled as preferred channel on  
currently selected Group.  
YELLOW  
Favourite group is changed.  
42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INPUT LIST  
HDMI and AV1 (SCART) can be recognized by a detect pin and thus enabled only when an external  
device approves voltage.  
By using TV/RAD button, you can move from External Input to RF Input and to the last watched pro-  
gramme in DTV/RADIO/TV mode.  
Image shown may differ from your TV.  
Input List  
Move  
OK  
Antenna  
RGB  
USB  
AV1  
AV2  
AV3  
Component  
HDMI1  
HDMI2  
HDMI3  
HDMI4  
Input Label  
Exit  
1
Antenna or Cable : Select it when watch-  
ing the DTV/RADIO/TV.  
Select the input source.  
USB : Select it when using USB depends  
on connector.  
AV : Select it when watching the VCR or  
external equipment.  
Component : Select it when using the  
DVD or the Digital set-top box depends on  
connector.  
RGB :Select it when using PC depends on  
connector.  
HDMI : Select it when using DVD, PC or  
Digital set-top box depend on connector.  
43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL  
INPUT LABEL  
Selects a label for each input source.  
Image shown may differ from your TV.  
Input Label  
Input List  
Move  
OK  
AV1  
AV2  
Antenna  
RGB  
USB  
AV1  
AV2  
AV3  
Component  
AV3  
Component  
RGB  
HDMI1  
HDMI2  
HDMI3  
HDMI4  
Input Label  
Exit  
Close  
1
2
3
Select Input Label.  
BLUE  
Select the source.  
Select the label.  
Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.  
Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.  
44  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
DATA SERVICE  
(This menu is enabled only in Ireland. )  
This function allow users to choose between MHEG(Digital Teletext) and Teletext if both exist at the same  
time.  
If only one of them exists, either MHEG or Teletext is enabled regardless of which option you select-  
ed.  
OPTION  
OPTION  
Move  
OK  
Move  
OK  
Language(Language)  
Language(Language)  
Country  
: Ireland  
Country  
: Ireland  
Disability Assistance  
Power Indicator  
Data Service  
Factory Reset  
Set ID  
Disability Assistance  
Power Indicator  
Data Service  
Factory Reset  
Set ID  
MHEG  
: MHEG  
:
Teletext  
: 1  
: 1  
Mode Setting  
: Home Use  
Mode Setting  
: Home Use  
1
2
3
4
Select OPTION.  
Select Data Service.  
Select MHEG or Teletext.  
Save.  
Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.  
Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.  
45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL  
SIMPLINK  
This function operates only with devices with the SIMPLINK logo.  
Please check the SIMPLINK logo.  
This TV might not function properly when using it with other products with HDMI-CEC function.  
This allows you to control and play other AV devices connected to the display through HDMI cable with-  
out additional cables and settings.  
If you do not want SIMPLINK menu,select “Off”.  
In wireless external output, SIMPLINK function is not supported.  
OK  
Exit  
On  
Watch TV  
DISC  
VCR  
HDD Recorder  
Speaker  
TV Speaker  
1
2
3
Display the SIMPLINK.  
Select On or Off.  
Save.  
Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.  
Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.  
46  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Connecting to Home Theater with the SIMPLINK logo.  
Connect the HDMI/DVI IN 1, HDMI IN 2  
1
(Except for 19/22LD3 ), HDMI IN 3 (Except  
***  
for 19/22/26/32LD3 , 32/37/42/47LD4  
,
***  
***  
19/22LE3 , 22LE5 ) or HDMI IN 4 (Only  
***  
***  
32LE3 , 32/42/47LE4  
,
***  
***  
terminal on the back of  
32/37/42/47/55LE5  
)
***  
the TV and the HDMI output terminal of the  
Home Theater using HDMI cables.  
Connect the Digital Audio output terminal on  
the back of the TV and the Digital Audio input  
terminal of the Home Theater using optical  
cables.  
2
3
1
2
Select Home Theater in the Speaker menu by  
pushing the SIMPLINK button.  
When you select or operate a media device with  
home theater function, the speaker automatically  
switches to home theater speaker (HT speaker).  
Home Theater  
NOTE  
Connect the HDMI/DVI IN or HDMI IN terminal of the TV to the terminal (HDMI terminal) of the SIMPLINK  
device with the HDMI cable.  
When you switch the Input source using the INPUT button on the remote control, you can stop the opera-  
tion of a device controlled by SIMPLINK.  
47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL  
SIMPLINK Functions  
Disc playback  
Control connected AV devices by pressing the  
, OK, , , l l, ◄◄ and ►► buttons.  
Direct Play  
After connecting AV devices to the TV, you can directly control the devices and play media without additional set-  
tings.  
Select AV device  
Enables you to select one of the AV devices connected to the TV and operate it.  
Power off all devices  
When you switch off the TV, all connected devices are turned off.  
Switch audio-out  
Offers an easy way to switch audio-out.  
Sync Power on  
When the equipment with Simplink function connected HDMI terminal starts to play, The TV will change automatically  
to turn on mode.  
* A device, which is connected to the TV through an HDMI cable but does not support SIMPLINK,  
does not provide this function.  
Note: To operate SIMPLINK, an High Speed HDMI Cable with *CEC function should be used.  
(*CEC: Consumer Electronics Control).  
48  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SIMPLINK Menu  
Press the  
button and then OK button to select the desired SIMPLINK source.  
1
TV viewing : Switch to the previous TV pro-  
gramme regardless of the current mode.  
OK  
Exit  
2
DISC playback : Select and play connected  
discs.  
On  
Watch TV  
1
2
Selected Device  
When multiple discs are available, the device  
type of discs are conveniently displayed at  
the bottom of the screen.  
When a device is con-  
nected (displayed in  
bright colour)  
DISC  
VCR  
3
4
5
When device is not con-  
nected (displayed in  
gray)  
3
4
VCR playback : Play and control the con-  
nected VCR.  
HDD Recorder  
Speaker  
TV Speaker  
HDD Recordings playback : Play and con-  
trol recordings stored in HDD.  
Audio Out to Home theater/Audio Out to  
TV: Select Home theater or TV speaker for  
Audio Out.  
5
• Home theater: Only one supported at a time  
• DVD, Recorder: Up to one(Only 19/22LD3 ), two(Only 26/32LD3 , 32/37/42/47LD4  
*** ***  
,
***  
19/22LE3 , 22LE5 ), three(Only 32/42/46/52/60LD5 , 26LE3 , 26LE5 ), four(Only 32LE3  
,
*** *** *** *** ***  
***  
32/37/42LE4 , 32/37/42/47/55LE5 ) supported at a time.  
*** ***  
• VCR: Only one supported at a time  
49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL  
AV MODE  
You can select the optimal images and sounds when connecting AV devices to external input.  
Off  
Disables the AV MODE.  
Cinema  
Sport  
Game  
Optimizes video and audio for watching movies.  
Optimizes video and audio for watching sports events.  
Optimizes video and audio for playing games.  
Off  
Cinema  
Sport  
Game  
1AV MODE  
2
Press the AV MODE button repeatedly to select the desired source.  
If you select Cinema in AV mode, Cinema will be selected both for  
Picture Mode and Sound Mode in PICTURE menu and AUDIO menu  
respectively.  
If you select “Off” in AV mode, the picture and image which you initially  
set will be selected.  
• When playing a video game using PlayStation or Xbox, it is recom-  
mended to use the Game mode.  
• When in Game mode, functions related to picture quality will be opti-  
mized for playing games.  
50  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
INITIALIZING(RESET TO ORIGINAL FACTORY SETTINGS)  
This function initializes all settings.  
But the settings of  
Day and  
Night of the Picture Mode cannot be initialized.  
It is useful to initialize the product or when you move to other city or country.  
When the Factory Reset is completed, you must restart the Initializing setup.  
When the Lock System menu is "On", the message to enter the password appears.  
OPTION  
OPTION  
Move  
OK  
Move  
OK  
Language(Language)  
Language(Language)  
Country  
: UK  
Country  
: UK  
Disability Assistance  
Power Indicator  
Factory Reset  
Set ID  
Disability Assistance  
Power Ind
All user settings and channel settings will  
be reset. Still Continue?  
Factory R
Set ID  
: 1  
Mode Setting  
: Home Use  
Mode Se
No  
Yes  
1
2
3
4
• In Lock System "On", if you forget your  
password, press '0', '3', '2', '5' on the  
remote control hands et.  
Select OPTION.  
Select Factory Reset.  
Select Yes.  
Start Factory Reset.  
Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.  
Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.  
51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TO USE A USB DEVICE  
WHEN CONNECTING A USB DEVICE  
When you connect a USB device, this pop up menu is displayed, automatically.  
“POP UP MENU” will not be displayed while the OSD including Menu, EPG or Schedule list is activat-  
ed.  
When the Pop Up menu appears, you can select Music List, Photo List or Movie List in the MY MEDIA  
menu.  
In USB device, you can not add a new folder or delete the existing folder.  
1 Connect the USB device to the USB IN  
• Only photo(JPEG), music (MP3) and movie  
(DAT,MPG,MPEG,VOB,AVI,DIVX,MP4,MKV,T  
jack on the TV.  
S,TRP,TP,ASF,WMV,FLV) are supported.  
or  
When removing the USB device  
Select the USB Device menu before removing  
the USB device.  
1
2
Select Movie List (Only  
Select USB Device.  
19/22/26/32LE3***, 32/37/42LE4***,  
22/26LE5***, 32/37/42/47/55LE5***,  
32/42/46/52/60LD56**,  
2
32/37/42/47LD46**,  
Select Eject.  
32/42/46/52/60LD555, 32/3742/47LD455,  
19/22/26/32LD355, 19/22/26/32LD356,  
19/22/26/32LD345, 19/22/26/32LD346  
32/37/42/47LD425, 32/37/42/47LD426,  
26/32LD335, 26/32LD336), Photo List or  
Music List.  
MY MEDIA  
Movie List  
Photo List  
Music List  
Press OK(  
) to see photos from the USB.  
Option  
Exit  
3
52  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Precautions when using the USB device  
Only a USB storage device is recognizable.  
If the USB storage device is connected through a USB hub, the device is not recognizable.  
A USB storage device using an automatic recognition programme may not be recognized.  
A USB storage device which uses its own driver may not be recognized.  
The recognition speed of a USB storage device may depend on each device.  
Please do not turn off the TV or unplug the USB device when the connected USB storage device is working.  
When such device is suddenly separated or unplugged, the stored files or the USB storage device may be  
damaged.  
Please do not connect the USB storage device which was artificially maneuvered on the PC. The  
device may cause the product to malfunction or fail to be played. Never forget to use only a USB stor-  
age device which has normal music files, image files or movie files.  
Please use only a USB storage device which was formatted as a FAT32 file system, NTFS file system  
provided with the Windows operating system. In case of a storage device formatted as a different utility  
programme which is not supported by Windows, it may not be recognized.  
Please connect power to a USB storage device(over 0.5 A) which requires an external power supply. If  
not, the device may not be recognized.  
Please connect a USB storage device with the cable offered by the device maker.  
Some USB storage devices may not be supported or operated smoothly.  
File alignment method of USB storage device is similar to Window XP and filename can recognize up to 100  
English characters.  
Be sure to back up important files since data stored in a USB memory device may be damaged. We  
will not be responsible for any data loss.  
If the USB HDD does not have an external power source, the USB device may not be detected. So be sure to  
connect the external power source. - Please use a power adaptor for an external power source. We do not guar-  
antee an USB cable for an external power source.  
If your USB memory device has multiple partitions, or if you use a USB multi-card reader, you can use  
up to 4 partitions or USB memory devices.  
If a USB memory device is connected to a USB multi-card reader, its volume data may not be detected.  
If the USB memory device does not work properly, disconnect and reconnect it.  
How fast a USB memory device is detected differs from device to device.  
If the USB is connected in Standby Mode, specific hard disk will automatically be loaded when the TV is  
turned on.  
The recommended capacity is 1 TB or less for a USB external hard disk and 32 GB or less for USB  
memory.  
Any device with more than the recommended capacity may not work properly.  
If a USB external hard disk with a "Energy Saving" function does not work, turn the hard disk off and on  
again to make it work properly.  
USB storage devices below USB 2.0 are supported as well. But they may not work properly in the  
movie list.  
Maximum of 999 folders or files can be recognized under one folder.  
53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TO USE A USB DEVICE  
MOVIE LIST  
(Only 19/22/26/32LE3***, 32/37/42LE4***, 22/26LE5***, 32/37/42/47/55LE5***,  
32/42/46/52/60LD56**, 32/37/42/47LD46**, 32/42/46/52/60LD555,  
32/3742/47LD455, 19/22/26/32LD355, 19/22/26/32LD356, 19/22/26/32LD345,  
19/22/26/32LD346 32/37/42/47LD425, 32/37/42/47LD426, 26/32LD335,  
26/32LD336)  
You can play movie files on a USB storage device.  
The movie list is activated once USB is detected. It is used when playing movie files on TV.  
Displays the movies in the USB folder and supports Play.  
Allows playback of all movies in the folder and user desired files.  
It is a movie list that displays folder information and movie file.  
The On Screen Display may be different from your TV. Images are an example to assist with the TV  
operation.  
Movie(*.mpg/*.mpeg/*dat/*.ts/*.trp/*.tp/*.vob/*.mp4/*.mov/*.mkv/*.dvix/*.avi/*.asf/*.wmv/*.flv/*.avi(motion-jpeg)/*.  
mp4(motion-jpeg)/*.mkv(motion-jpeg))supporting file  
Video format : DivX3.11, DivX4.12, DivX5.x, DivX6, Xvid1.00, Xvid1.01, Xvid1.02, Xvid1.03, Xvid1.10 beta-1/beta-2,  
Mpeg-1, Mpeg-2, Mpeg-4, H.264/AVC, VC1, JPEG, Sorenson H.263  
Audio format : Dolby Digital, AAC, Mpeg, MP3, LPCM, HE-AAC, ADPCM, WMA  
Bit rate : within 32 kbps to 320 kbps(MP3)  
External Subtitle format : *.smi/*.srt/*.sub(MicroDVD,Subviewer1.0/2.0)/*.ass/*.ssa/*.txt(TMPlayer)/*.psb(PowerDivX)  
Internal Subtitle format : only, XSUB (It is the subtitle format used in DivX6 files)  
• Some user-created subtitles may not work properly.  
• Some special characters are not supported in subtitles.  
• HTML tags are not supported in subtitles.  
• Subtitles in languages other than the supported languages are not available.  
• The screen may suffer temporary interruptions (image stoppage, faster playback, etc.) when the audio language is  
changed.  
• A damaged movie file may not be played correctly, or some player functions may not be usable.  
• Movie files produced with some encoders may not be played correctly.  
• If the video and audio structure of recorded file is not interleaved, either video or audio is outputted.  
• HD videos with a maximum of 1920x1080@25/30P or 1280x720@50/60P are supported, depending on the frame.  
• Videos with resolutions higher than 1920X1080@25/30P or 1280x720@50/60P may not work properly depending on  
the frame.  
• Movie files other than the specified types and formats may not work properly.  
Max bitrate of playable movie file is 20 Mbps. (only, Motion JPEG : 10 Mbps)  
• We do not guarantee smooth playback of profiles encoded level 4.1 or higher in H.264/AVC.  
• DTS Audio codec is not supported.  
• A movie file more than 30 GB in file size is not supported for playback.  
• A DivX movie file and its subtitle file must be located in the same folder.  
• A video file name and its subtitle file name must be identical for it to be displayed.  
• Playing a video via a USB connection that doesn’t support high speed may not work properly.  
• Files encoded with GMC(Global Motion Compensation) may not be played.  
• When you are watching the movie by Movie List function, you can adjust an image by Energy Saving and AV Mode  
key on the remote control. User setup for each image mode does not operate.  
54  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
File  
Extension name  
Video Decoder  
Audio Codec  
Max Resolution  
mpg, mpeg  
dat  
MPEG1, MPEG2  
MPEG1  
MP2,MP3,Dolby Digital,LPCM  
MP2  
MP2,MP3,Dolby Digital,  
AAC,HE-AAC  
ts,trp,tp  
vob  
MPEG2, H.264, AVS, VC1  
MPEG1, 2  
MP2,MP3,Dolby Digital,LPCM  
MPEG4,DivX 3.11, DivX 4.12, DivX 5.x,  
DivX 6, Xvid 1.00, Xvid 1.01, Xvid 1.02,  
Xvid 1.03, Xvid 1.10-beta1/2H.264  
mp4, mov  
mkv  
AAC,HE-AAC,MP3  
MP2,MP3,Dolby Digital,AAC  
HE-AAC,LPCM  
1920x1080@30p  
H.264, MPEG-1,2,4  
(only , Motion JPEG  
640x480@30p)  
MPEG2, MPEG4,DivX 3.11, DivX 4.  
DivX 5, DivX 6, Xvid 1.00, Xvid 1.01,  
Xvid 1.02, Xvid 1.03, Xvid  
MP2,MP3,Dolby Digital,LPCM,  
ADPCM,AAC,HE-AAC  
divx, avi  
1.10-beta1/2H.264  
Motion JPEG  
JPEG  
LPCM, ADPCM  
(avi, mp4, mkv)  
asf, wmv  
flv  
VC1  
WMA  
Sorenson H.263, H264  
MP3, AAC  
55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TO USE A USB DEVICE  
Screen Components  
You can also adjust USB in the INPUT menu.  
2
1
Select Movie List.  
Select MY MEDIA.  
2
1
1
2
3
Moves to upper level folder  
Current page/Total pages  
Page 1/1  
Movie List  
Page 1/1  
Drive1  
5
4
Corresponding buttons on the  
remote control  
001  
005  
002  
006  
003  
004  
4
5
Contents under the folder  
1
focused on  
Current page/ total pages of  
contents under the folder  
1
focused on  
MARK  
Exit  
Move  
Play  
P
Page Change  
Mark  
To Photo List  
Change Numbers  
Mark Mode  
3
• Some files may be displayed  
the preview image by icon  
only.  
• Non-supported files are  
displayed the preview  
image by icon only.  
• Abnormal files are  
displayed in the  
form of bitmap.  
56  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Movie Selection  
When playing movie files  
Page 1/1  
Movie List  
Page 1/1  
Drive1  
001  
005  
002  
006  
003  
004  
051. Apple_ ......  
02:30:25  
MARK  
Move  
Play  
P
Page Change  
Mark  
Exit  
To Photo List  
Change Numbers  
Mark Mode  
1
2
3
Use the P  
movie page.  
button to navigation in the  
Select the target folder or drive.  
Select the desired movie title.  
Movie files are played.  
Using the remote control  
GREEN  
Repeatedly, press the GREEN button to converted to Photo List->Music List.  
YELLOW  
A method to view in 5 large thumbnail or simple list.  
BLUE  
Convert to Mark Mode.  
Return to normal TV viewing.  
EXIT  
( )  
Press the PLAY button to return to normal playback.  
57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TO USE A USB DEVICE  
When selected movie files are played  
Page 1/1  
Movie List  
Mark Mode  
Page 1/1  
Drive1  
001  
005  
002  
006  
003  
004  
051. Apple_ ......  
02:30:25  
MARK  
Mark  
Move  
Mark  
P
Page Change  
Play Marked  
Exit  
Mark All  
Unmark All  
Exit Mark Mode  
1
2
3
Select the target folder or drive.  
When one or more movie files are  
marked, the marked movies will  
be played in sequence.  
Select the desired movie title.  
Convert to Mark Mode.  
Mark desired Movie file.  
BLUE or  
4
5
RED  
Marked movie file is played.  
NOTE  
In the case of files not supported, a message regarding non-supported file is displayed.  
58  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the remote control  
Play the selected movie file.  
Once a movie file finishes playing, the next selected one will be played automatically.  
RED  
GREEN  
YELLOW  
BLUE  
EXIT  
Mark all movie files on the screen.  
Deselect all marked movie files.  
Exit the Mark Mode.  
Return to normal TV viewing.  
NOTE  
If you select “Yes” from OSD when playing the same file after the movie file has been stopped, it will restart  
where it stopped previously.  
If continuous series files exist within the folder, the next file will automatically be played.  
But, this excludes cases when the Repeat function of Movie List Option is turned “On” (Refer to p. 62) or  
when set as Marked Play.  
59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TO USE A USB DEVICE  
Using the Movie List function, play  
Choose options.  
Set Video Play.  
Set Video.  
Set Audio.  
Close  
◄►  
01:02:30 / 02:30:25  
Option  
Q.MENU  
Hide  
Exit  
II ◄◄ ►►  
1
2
or  
Show the Option menu.  
Select Set Video Play., Set Video. or Set  
Audio..  
NOTE  
Option values changed in Movie List does not affect Photo List and Music List.  
Option value changed in Photo List and Music List are changed likewise in Photo List and Music List  
excluding Movie List.  
When replaying the video file after stopping, you can play from where it stopped previously.  
60  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the remote control  
Stop the playing movie file.  
( )  
Press the PLAY button to return to normal playback.  
( )  
During playback, press the Pause II button.  
Still screen is displayed.  
If no buttons are pressed on the remote control for 10 minutes after pausing, the  
II  
TV returns to the playback state.  
( )  
Press the Pause II button and then use the FF(►►) button for slow motion.  
When playing,  
(
)
repeatedly, press the REW ◄◄ button to speed up ◄◄(x2) -> ◄◄◄(x4) ->  
◄◄◄◄(x8) ->◄◄◄◄◄(x16) ->◄◄◄◄◄◄(x32) .  
repeatedly, press the FF ►► button to speed up ►►(x2)-> ►►►(x4) ->  
►►►►(x8) ->►►►►►(x16) -> ►►►►►►(x32).  
(
)
◄◄ / ►►  
Pressing these buttons repeatedly increases the fast forward/reverse speed.  
or  
Show the Option menu.  
Hide the menu on the full-sized screen.  
To see the menu again on the full-sized screen, press OK button to display.  
Return to normal TV viewing.  
<
>
When using the or button during playback a cursor indicating the position can  
< >  
be viewed on the screen.  
ENERGY  
Press the ENERGY SAVING button repeatedly to change the brightness of your  
screen.(Refer to p. 95)  
SAVING  
AV MODE  
Press the AV MODE button repeatedly to select the desired source.(Refer to p. 50)  
61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TO USE A USB DEVICE  
When you select the Set Video Play,  
Set Video Play.  
Picture Size  
Full  
1
Audio Language  
Subtitle Language  
Language  
Code page  
Sync  
On  
English  
Default  
0
Position  
0
Size  
Normal  
Repeat  
On  
Previous  
1
2
Select Picture Size, Audio Language,  
Subtitle Langugae or Repeat.  
Picture Size : Selects your desired picture  
format during movie play.  
Make appropriate adjustments.  
Audio Language : Changes the Language  
Files  
Group of the audio during movie play.  
with a single audio track cannot be selected.  
Subtitle Langugae  
Subtitle Language  
Support Language  
: Turn on/off the subtitle.  
English, Spanish, French, German, Italian, Swedish,  
Finnish, Dutch, Portuguese, Danish, Romanian,  
Norwegian, Albanian, Gaelic, Welsh, Irish,  
Catalan,Valencian  
Language : Activated for SMI subtitle and  
Latin1  
can select the language within the subtitle.  
Code page : Can select the font for subti-  
tle. When set to default, same font as gen-  
eral menu will be used.  
Sync : Adjusts the time synchronisation of  
the subtitle from -10 secs to +10 secs by  
steps of 0.5 secs during movie play.  
Position : Changes the position of the  
subtitle either up or down during movie  
play.  
Bosnian, Polish, Croatian, Czech,  
Latin2  
Slovak, Slovenian, Serbian, Hungarian  
Latin4  
Cyrillic  
Greek  
Turkish  
Estonian, Latvian, Lithuanian  
Bulgarian, Macedonian, Russian, Ukrainian, Kazakh  
Greek  
Turkish  
Size : Selects your desired Subtitle size  
during movie play.  
Repeat : Turn on/off repeat function of  
movie playback. When turned on, the file  
within the folder will be played back  
repeatedly. Even when the repeated play-  
back is turned off, it can run the playback if  
the file name is similar to the previous file.  
NOTE  
Only 10,000 of sync blocks can be supported within the subtitle file.  
When playing a video, you can adjust the Picture Size by pressing the RATIO button.  
62  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
When you select the Set Video,  
Set Video.  
Picture Mode  
Standard  
Backlight  
Contrast  
Brightness  
Colour  
70  
100  
50  
60  
Dynamic Contrast  
Edge Enhancer  
Noise Reduction  
Medium  
High  
Medium  
(Only 32/42/46/52/60LD5  
,
TruMotion  
***  
Low  
32/37/42/47/55LE5  
)
***  
Picture Reset  
Previous  
1
2
Select Picture Mode or TruMotion.  
Make appropriate adjustments. (Refer to p. 96 to 103)  
63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TO USE A USB DEVICE  
When you select the Set Audio,  
Set Audio.  
Sound Mode  
Standard  
Auto Volume  
Clear Voice II  
Balance  
Off  
Off  
L
R
0
Previous  
1
Select Sound Mode, Auto Volume, Clear Voice II or  
Balance.  
2
Make appropriate adjustments. (Refer to p. 107 to 111)  
64  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PHOTO LIST  
You can view photo files on USB storage device.  
The On Screen Display may be different from your TV. Images are an example to assist with the TV operation.  
When you are watching the photo by the Photo List function, you can not change the picture mode.  
PHOTO(*.JPEG) supporting file  
Baseline : 64 x 64 15360 x 8640  
to  
Progressive : 64 x 64 to 1920 x 1440  
You can play JPEG files only.  
• Non-supported files are displayed in the form of predefined icon.  
Screen Components  
You can also adjust USB in the INPUT menu.  
2
1
Select Photo List.  
Select MY MEDIA.  
2
1
1
2
3
Moves to upper level folder  
Current page/Total pages  
Page 1/1  
Photo List  
Page 1/1  
Drive1  
5
4
Corresponding buttons on the  
remote control  
001  
002  
003  
004  
013  
005  
014  
006  
007  
008  
009  
4
5
Contents under the folder  
1
focused on  
010  
011  
012  
015  
Current page/ total pages of  
contents under the folder  
1
focused on  
MARK  
Mark  
Move  
View  
P
Page Change  
Exit  
To Music List  
Change Numbers  
Mark Mode  
3
65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TO USE A USB DEVICE  
Photo Selection  
When playing photo files  
Page 1/1  
Photo List  
Page 1/1  
Drive1  
001  
010  
002  
003  
004  
013  
005  
014  
006  
007  
008  
009  
011  
012  
015  
MARK  
Exit  
Move  
View  
P
Page Change  
Mark  
To Music List  
Change Numbers  
Mark Mode  
1
2
3
Use the P  
photo page.  
button to navigation in the  
Select the target folder or drive.  
Select the desired photos.  
Photo files are displayed.  
Using the remote control  
GREEN  
Repeatedly, press the GREEN button to converted to Music List->Movie List.  
YELLOW  
A method to view in 5 large thumbnail or simple list.  
BLUE  
Convert to Mark Mode.  
Return to normal TV viewing.  
66  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
When selected photo files are displayed  
Page 1/1  
Photo List  
Mark Mode  
Page 1/1  
Drive1  
001  
010  
002  
003  
004  
013  
005  
014  
006  
007  
008  
009  
011  
012  
015  
MARK  
Move  
Mark  
P
Page Change  
Mark  
Exit  
View Marked  
Mark All  
Unmark All  
Exit Mark Mode  
1
2
3
When one or more photos are marked, you  
can view each marked photo or a slide show  
of the marked photos. If no photos are  
marked, you can view every individual photo  
in the folder or a slide show of all photos in  
the folder.  
Select the target folder or drive.  
Select the desired photos.  
Convert to Mark Mode.  
Mark desired photo file.  
BLUE or  
4
5
RED  
Marked photo file is displayed.  
67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TO USE A USB DEVICE  
Using the remote control  
RED  
Display the selected photo file.  
GREEN  
Mark all photo files on the screen.  
YELLOW  
Deselect all marked photo files.  
BLUE  
Exit the Mark Mode.  
Return to normal TV viewing.  
68  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
How to view photo  
Detailed operations are available on full-sized photo view screen.  
Page 1/1  
Photo List  
Page 1/1  
Drive1  
001  
010  
002  
003  
004  
013  
005  
014  
006  
007  
008  
009  
011  
012  
015  
MARK  
Mark  
Move  
View  
P
Page Change  
Exit  
To Music List  
Change Numbers  
Mark Mode  
01_a.jpg  
2008/12/10  
1920 x 1080  
479 KB  
The aspect ratio of a photo may change the size  
of the photo displayed on the screen in full size.  
Press the EXIT button to move to the previous  
menu screen.  
2/13  
Slideshow  
BGM  
Q.MENU  
Hide  
Exit  
Option  
1
2
Select the target folder or drive.  
Use the P  
photo page.  
button to navigation in the  
Select the desired photos.  
3
The selected photo is displayed in full  
size.  
Press the EXIT button to go back to Photo List.  
Press the BACK button to make Help OSD disappear.  
69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TO USE A USB DEVICE  
01_a.jpg  
Select the  
Slideshow,  
2008/12/10  
1920 x 1080  
479 KB  
4
BGM, (Rotate),  
(ZOOM IN),  
Option, Hide or  
Exit.  
,
Use button to select the previous  
or next photo.  
2/13  
Use button to select and control  
the menu on the full-sized screen.  
Slideshow  
BGM  
Q.MENU  
Hide  
Exit  
Option  
Slideshow : When no picture is selected, all photos in the cur-  
rent folder are displayed during slide show. If some photos are  
selected, those photos are displayed in a slide show.  
Set the time interval of the slide show in Option.  
BGM (Background Music) : Listen to music while viewing photos  
in full size.  
Set the BGM device and album in Options before using  
this function.  
You can adjust Option by Q.MENU or MENU button on  
the remote control.  
(Rotate)  
: Rotate photos.  
Rotates the photo 90°, 180°, 270°, 360° clockwise.  
It can not be rotate when the width of a picture is bigger  
than supported height.  
ZOOM IN  
): View the photo by zoom in 2, 4 times.  
(
Press the ENERGY SAVING button repeatedly to  
:
change the brightness of your screen.(Refer to p. 95)  
Option : Set values for Slide Speed and BGM.  
Use button and OK button to set values. Press  
OK to save the settings.  
You cannot change BGM while BGM is playing.  
Hide : Hide the menu on the full-sized screen.  
To see the menu again on the full-sized screen, press  
OK button to display.  
Press the EXIT button to go back to Photo List.  
70  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the Photo List function  
01_a.jpg  
2008/12/10  
1920 x 1080  
479 KB  
Choose options.  
Set Photo View.  
Set Video.  
Set Audio.  
Close  
2/13  
Slideshow  
BGM  
Q.MENU  
Hide  
Exit  
Option  
1
2
or  
Show the Option menu.  
Select Set Photo View., Set Video. or Set  
Audio..  
NOTE  
Option values changed in Movie List does not affect Photo List and Music List.  
Option value changed in Photo List and Music List are changed likewise in Photo List and Music List  
excluding Movie List.  
71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TO USE A USB DEVICE  
When you select the Set Photo View,  
Set Photo View.  
Slide Speed  
Fast  
BGM  
Drive1  
On  
Repeat  
Random  
Off  
Previous  
1
2
Select Slide Speed or BGM.  
Make appropriate adjustments.  
72  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
When you select the Set Video,  
Set Video.  
Picture Mode  
Standard  
Backlight  
Contrast  
Brightness  
Colour  
70  
100  
50  
60  
Dynamic Contrast  
Edge Enhancer  
Noise Reduction  
Medium  
High  
Medium  
(Only 32/42/46/52/60LD5  
,
TruMotion  
***  
Low  
32/37/42/47/55LE5  
)
***  
Picture Reset  
Previous  
1
2
Select Picture Mode or TruMotion.  
Make appropriate adjustments. (Refer to p. 96 to103)  
73  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TO USE A USB DEVICE  
When you select the Set Audio,  
Set Audio.  
Sound Mode  
Standard  
Auto Volume  
Clear Voice II  
Balance  
Off  
Off  
L
R
0
Previous  
1
Select Sound Mode, Auto Volume, Clear Voice II or  
Balance.  
2
Make appropriate adjustments. (Refer to p. 107 to 111)  
74  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MUSIC LIST  
You can play music files on USB storage device.  
Purchased music files(*.MP3) may contain copyright restrictions. Playback of these files may not be  
supported by this model.  
Music file on your USB device can be played by this unit.  
The On Screen Display may be different from your TV. Images are an example to assist with the TV  
operation.  
MUSIC (*.MP3) supporting file  
Bit rate 32 320  
to  
• Sampling rate MPEG1 Layer3 : 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz  
• Sampling rate MPEG2 Layer3 : 16 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 24 kHz  
• Sampling rate MPEG2.5 Layer3 : 8 kHz, 11.025 kHz, 12 kHz  
Screen Components  
You can also adjust USB in the INPUT menu.  
2
1
Select Music List.  
Select MY MEDIA.  
3
2
1
Preview: If any album jacket  
for the file(Album Art Image)  
exists, this jacket is displayed.  
Page 1/1  
Music List  
Page 1/1  
Drive1  
6
5
2
3
4
Moves to upper level folder  
Current page/Total pages  
001. - B01.mp3  
00:00  
002. - B02.mp3  
00:00  
003. - B03.mp3  
00:00  
004. - B04.mp3  
00:00  
1
Corresponding buttons on the  
remote control  
005. - B05.mp3  
00:00  
5 Contents under the folder  
2
focused on  
6
Current page/ total pages of  
MARK  
Move  
Play  
P
Page Change  
Mark  
contents under the folder  
focused on  
Exit  
To Movie List  
Change Numbers  
Mark Mode  
2
4
(Only 19/22/26/32LE3***, 32/37/42LE4***, 22/26LE5***,  
32/37/42/47/55LE5***, 32/42/46/52/60LD56**, 32/37/42/47LD46**,  
32/42/46/52/60LD555, 32/3742/47LD455, 19/22/26/32LD355,  
19/22/26/32LD356, 19/22/26/32LD345, 19/22/26/32LD346  
32/37/42/47LD425, 32/37/42/47LD426, 26/32LD335, 26/32LD336)  
75  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TO USE A USB DEVICE  
Music Selection  
Page 1/1  
Music List  
Page 1/1  
Drive1  
001. - B01.mp3  
00:00  
002. - B02.mp3  
00:00  
003. - B03.mp3  
00:00  
004. - B04.mp3  
00:00  
005. - B05.mp3  
00:00  
MARK  
Mark  
Move  
Play  
P
Page Change  
Exit  
To Movie List  
Change Numbers  
Mark Mode  
When playing music files  
Use the P  
button to navigate up/down in  
the music page.  
1
Select the target folder or drive.  
2
3
Select the desired music title.  
Music files are played.  
Using the remote control  
GREEN  
Repeatedly, press the GREEN button to converted to Movie List->Photo List.  
A method to view in 5 large thumbnail or simple list.  
Convert to Mark Mode.  
YELLOW  
BLUE  
Return to normal TV viewing.  
76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
When selected music files are played  
Page 1/1  
Music List  
Mark Mode  
Page 1/1  
Drive1  
001. - B01.mp3  
00:00  
002. - B02.mp3  
00:00  
003. - B03.mp3  
00:00  
004. - B04.mp3  
00:00  
005. - B05.mp3  
00:00  
MARK  
Move  
Mark  
P
Page Change  
Mark  
Play Marked  
Exit  
Mark All  
Unmark All  
Exit Mark Mode  
1
2
3
When one or more music files are marked,  
the marked music title will be played in  
sequence. For example, if you want to listen  
to only one music repeatedly, just mark the  
music only and play it. If no music is marked,  
all the music in the folder will be played in  
sequence.  
Select the target folder or drive.  
Select the desired music title.  
Convert to Mark Mode.  
Mark desired music file.  
BLUE or  
If you want to activate Random playback, you  
must set Option->Set audio play.->Random  
to On.  
4
5
RED  
Marked music file is played.  
77  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TO USE A USB DEVICE  
Using the remote control  
RED  
Display the selected music file.  
GREEN  
Mark all music files on the screen.  
YELLOW  
Deselect all marked music files.  
BLUE  
Exit the Mark Mode.  
Return to normal TV viewing.  
78  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the Music List function, play  
Page 1/1  
Music List  
3 file(s) Marked  
Page 1/1  
Drive1  
Choose options.  
Set Audio Play.  
Set Audio.  
004. - B04.mp3  
00:00  
005. - B05.mp3  
00:00  
006. - B06.mp3  
00:00  
007. - B07.mp3  
00:00  
008. - B08.mp3  
00:00  
Close  
◄►  
02:30 / 03:25  
005. - B05.mp3  
Play with Photo  
Q.MENU  
Option  
Hide  
Exit  
◄◄ ►►  
II  
1
2
or  
Show the Option menu.  
Select Set Audio Play. or Set Audio.  
NOTE  
Option values changed in Movie List does not affect Photo List and Music List.  
Option value changed in Photo List and Music List are changed likewise in Photo List and Music List  
excluding Movie List.  
79  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TO USE A USB DEVICE  
Using the remote control  
Stop the playing music file.  
( )  
Press the PLAY button to return to normal playback.  
( )  
When you press the Pause II button while playing the file, the playback will be  
paused.  
II  
( )  
When you press the Pause II button again while the playback is paused, it will  
resume the playback.  
When playing,  
(
)
◄◄ / ►►  
When you press the REW ◄◄ button, the previous music file will be played.  
When you press the FF ►► button, the next music file will be played.  
(
)
GREEN  
Start playing the selected music files and then move to the Photo List.  
ENERGY  
Press the ENERGY SAVING button repeatedly to change the brightness of your  
screen.(Refer to p. 95)  
SAVING  
Only Off/Screen Off operates from the Movie List, Photo List, Music List.  
or  
Show the Option menu.  
When you press the Back button while the music is playing, the music player cur-  
rently playing will be hidden and only the music list will be displayed.  
When you press the Exit button while the Music player is displayed, only the  
music will be stopped and the player will not return to normal TV viewing.  
When you press the Exit button while the music is stopped or while the music  
player is hidden, the player will return to normal TV viewing.  
<
>
When using the or button during playback a cursor indicating the position can  
< >  
be played.  
80  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
When you select the Set Audio Play,  
Set Audio Play.  
Repeat  
On  
Off  
Random  
Previous  
1
2
Select Repeat or Random.  
Make appropriate adjustments.  
81  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TO USE A USB DEVICE  
When you select the Set Audio,  
Set Audio.  
Sound Mode  
Standard  
Auto Volume  
Clear Voice II  
Balance  
Off  
Off  
L
R
0
Previous  
1
Select Sound Mode, Auto Volume, Clear Voice II or  
Balance.  
2
Make appropriate adjustments. (Refer to p. 107 to 111)  
82  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
If you don't press any button for a while during the playing, the  
play information box (as shown in the below) will float as a  
screen saver.  
The ‘Screen Saver’?  
Screen saver is to prevent screen pixel damage due to an  
fixed image remaining on the screen for a extended period of  
time.  
002. B02.mp3  
00:31 / 04:04  
NOTE  
A damaged or corrupted music does not play but displays 00:00 in playtime.  
A music downloaded from a paid service with copyright protection does not start but displays inappropriate  
information in playtime.  
If you press OK,  
The PLAY(), Pause(II),  
You can use the ►► button to select the next music and the ◄◄ button to select the previous music.  
buttons, screen saver is stopped.  
, ►►, ◄◄ buttons on the remote control are also available in this mode.  
83  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TO USE A USB DEVICE  
DIVX REGISTRATION CODE  
(Only 19/22/26/32LE3***, 32/37/42LE4***, 22/26LE5***, 32/37/42/47/55LE5***, 32/42/46/52/60LD56**,  
32/37/42/47LD46**, 32/42/46/52/60LD555, 32/3742/47LD455, 19/22/26/32LD355, 19/22/26/32LD356,  
19/22/26/32LD345, 19/22/26/32LD346 32/37/42/47LD425, 32/37/42/47LD426, 26/32LD335,  
26/32LD336)  
Confirm the DivX registration code number of the TV. Using the registration number, movies can be  
rented or purchased at www.divx.com/vod.  
With a DivX registration code from other TV, playback of rented or purchased DivX file is not allowed.  
(Only DivX files matched with the registration code of the purchased TV are playable.)  
You must register your device to  
MY MEDIA  
DivX Reg.Code  
Deactivation  
play DivX protected videos.  
Registration code : **********  
Register at http://vod.divx.com  
Previous  
Movie List  
Photo List  
Music List  
Close  
Press OK(  
) to see photos from the USB.  
Option  
Exit  
1
2
3
Select MY MEDIA.  
BLUE  
Select DivX Reg. Code.  
Display DivX Reg. Code.  
Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.  
®
ABOUT DIVX VIDEO: DivX is a digital video format created by DivX,Inc. This  
is an official DivX Certified device that plays DivX video. Visit www.divx.com  
for more information and software tools to convert your files into DivX video.  
®
ABOUT DIVX VIDEO-ON-DEMAND: This DivX Certified device must be reg-  
istered in order to play DivX Video-on-Demand (VOD) content. To generate  
the registration code, locate the DivX VOD section in the device setup menu.  
Go to vod.divx.com with this code to complete the registration process and  
learn more about DivX VOD.  
“DivX Certified to play DivX video up to HD 1080p, including premium content”  
“Pat. 7,295,673; 7,460,668; 7,515,710; 7,519,274”  
NOTE  
Movie files are supported as follows  
Resolution : under 1920x1080 WxH pixels  
Frame rate : under 30 frames/sec(1920x1080), under 60 frames/sec(under 1280x720)  
Video Codec : MPEG 1, MPEG 2, MPEG 4, H.264/AVC, DivX 3.11, DivX 4.12, DivX 5.x, DivX 6, Xvid 1.00,  
84  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
DEACTIVATION  
(Only 19/22/26/32LE3***, 32/37/42LE4***, 22/26LE5***, 32/37/42/47/55LE5***, 32/42/46/52/60LD56**,  
32/37/42/47LD46**, 32/42/46/52/60LD555, 32/3742/47LD455, 19/22/26/32LD355, 19/22/26/32LD356,  
19/22/26/32LD345, 19/22/26/32LD346 32/37/42/47LD425, 32/37/42/47LD426, 26/32LD335,  
26/32LD336)  
The purpose of deactivation is to allow deactivation of devices for users who have activated all the  
available devices through the web_server and are blocked from activating more devices. DivX VOD  
allowed the consumer to activate up to 6 devices under one account, but to replace or deactivate any  
of those devices, the consumer had to contact DivX Support and request deletion. Now with this  
added feature, consumers will be able to deactivate the device themselves and hence better manage  
their DivX VOD devices.  
Deregistration code :  
MY MEDIA  
DivX Reg.Code  
Deactivation  
********  
Deregister at http://vod.divx.com  
Continue with registration?  
Previous  
Movie List  
Photo List  
Music List  
Yes  
No  
Press OK(  
) to see photos from the USB.  
Option  
Exit  
1
2
3
4
Select MY MEDIA.  
BLUE  
Select Deactivation.  
Select Yes.  
Display Deactivation.  
Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.  
Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.  
85  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
EPG(ELECTRONIC PROGRAMME GUIDE)  
(IN DIGITAL MODE)  
This system has an Electronic Programme Guide (EPG) to help your navigation through all the possible  
viewing options.  
The EPG supplies information such as programme listings, start and end times for all available services. In  
addition, detailed information about the programme is often available in the EPG (the availability and  
amount of these programme details will vary, depending on the particular broadcaster).  
This function can be used only when the EPG information is broadcast by broadcasting companies.  
You must set the Clock in the Time menu, before using EPG function.  
The EPG displays the programme details for 8 days.  
Pr. Change  
Next  
Watch  
DTV 1 TV ONE  
Good Morning  
16:9  
HE-AAC  
...  
720p  
21:00  
00:00  
Show/Game Show  
Sarah Bradley, Steve Gray and Brendon Pongia present the latest in fashion, the arts, entertainment, lifestyle and cooking,  
with regular and special guests.  
Sarah Bradley, Steve Gray and Brendon Pongia present the latest in fashion, the arts, entertainment, lifestyle and cooking,  
Up  
with
regular and special guests  
Down  
Shows current programme information  
Displayed with a TV or DTV Programme.  
Displayed with a Radio Programme.  
Displayed with a MHEG Programme.  
Displayed with a HE-AAC Programme.  
Aspect ratio of broadcasting programme.  
Displayed with a Teletext Programme.  
Displayed with a Subtitle Programme.  
Displayed with a Scramble Programme.  
Displayed with a Dolby Digital Programme.  
Displayed with a Dolby Digital PLUS Programme.  
HE-AAC  
Aspect ratio of broadcasting programme.  
576i/p, 720p, 1080i/p : Resolution of broadcasting programme  
Broadcasted programme with the icon may not be displayed in Monitor Out depending on the informa-  
tion of the programme.  
Shows next programme information.  
Shows other programme information.  
Tyra  
2 TV2  
28 Sep. 2008 21:00~00:00  
Record  
Remind  
Close  
Pr. Change  
Now  
Schedule  
DTV 2 TV2  
Tyra  
21:00  
00:00  
Show/Game Show  
Talk show host Tyra Banks sits down with Keyshia Cole, the cast of Gossip Girl and Rihanna.  
Talk show host Tyra Banks sits down with Keyshia Cole, the cast of Gossip Girl and Rihanna.  
A pop-up window for record/remind settings  
appear.  
Select Timer Record/Remind setting mode.  
86  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Switch on/off EPG  
1
Switch on or off EPG.  
Select a programme  
1
or  
Select desired programme.  
Button Function in NOW/NEXT Guide Mode  
You can view a program being broadcasted and one scheduled to follow.  
Programme Guide  
RED  
YELLOW  
BLUE  
Change EPG mode.  
25 Nov. 2008 10:05  
NEXT  
That ’70s show  
DTV 1 YLE TV1 25 Nov. 2008 09:45~10:15  
NOW  
ALL  
YLE TV1  
Enter Manual Timer mode.  
Enter Schedule List mode.  
1
2
4
5
6
8
That ’70s show  
Keno  
YLE TV2  
TV..  
Your World Today  
Legenen om Den....  
Naturtimmen  
Lyssna  
World Business  
Fantomen  
Kritiskt  
YLE FST  
CNN  
ABC  
YLE24  
Glamour  
Tänään otsikoissa  
When ‘Now’ is selected, it is moved to  
selected program and EPG disappears  
FAV Favourite  
Mode  
INFO  
i
Information  
Watch/Schedule  
Manual Timer  
TV/RAD RADIO  
Schedule List  
When ‘Next’ is selected, a reservation  
pop-up window appears.  
or  
or  
Switch off EPG.  
Select NOW or NEXT Programme.  
Select the Broadcast Programme.  
Page Up/Down.  
Select DTV or RADIO Programme.  
Detail information on or off  
87  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
EPG (ELECTRONIC PROGRAMME GUIDE)  
Button Function in 8 Day Guide Mode  
Programme Guide  
25 Nov. 2008 10:05  
That ’70s show  
DTV 1 YLE TV1 25 Nov. 2008 09:45~10:15  
RED  
GREEN  
YELLOW  
BLUE  
Tue. 25 Nov.  
15:00  
Change EPG mode.  
ALL  
YLE TV1  
14:00  
1
2
4
5
6
8
Antigues Roadshow  
Mint Extra TV2: Farmen  
The Drum  
Kungskonsumente  
The Drum  
YLE TV2  
TV..  
Enter Date setting mode.  
Enter Manual Timer mode.  
Enter Schedule List mode.  
YLE FST  
CNN  
You Call The Hits  
Fashion Essentials  
YLE24  
...  
...  
... ...  
Tänään otsikoissa  
FAV Favourite  
Mode  
INFO  
Date  
i
Information  
Watch/Schedule  
Manual Timer  
TV/RAD RADIO  
Schedule List  
Page Up/Down.  
or  
When ‘Currently broadcasting programme  
is selected, it is moved to selected pro-  
gramme and EPG disappears  
or  
Switch off EPG.  
When ‘Future broadcasting programme is  
selected, a reservation pop-up window  
appears.  
Select DTV or RADIO Programme.  
Detail information on or off  
Select Programme.  
Select the Broadcast Programme.  
88  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Button Function in Date Change Mode  
Programme Guide  
Switch off Date setting  
mode.  
25 Nov. 2008 10:05  
That ’70s show  
or  
or  
GREEN  
DTV 1 YLE TV1 25 Nov. 2008 09:45~10:15  
Tue. 25 Nov.  
15:00  
ALL  
14:00  
1
2
4
5
6
8
YLE TV1  
YLE TV2  
TV..  
Kungskonsumente  
The Drum  
Antigues Roadshow  
Mint Extra TV2: Farmen  
The Drum  
Change to the selected date.  
Select a date.  
YLE FST  
CNN  
You Call The Hits  
Fashion Essentials  
YLE24  
...  
...  
... ...  
Tänään otsikoissa  
Date Change  
Date Exit  
or  
Switch off EPG.  
Button Function in Extended Description Box  
DTV 1 YLE TV1 25  
25 Nov. 2008 10:05  
The detail information on or off.  
Fia World Touring Car Chanpionship  
Tue. 25 Nov. 2008 10:05  
12:40  
Fia Champion  
Text Up/Down.  
Miss Gotto's Haunted house/Cry of The Swamp; Miss Gotto's  
Haunted house/Cry of The Swamp; Miss Gotto's Haunted  
house/Cry of The Swamp; Miss Gotto's Haunted house/Cry  
of The Swamp; Miss Gotto's Haunted house/Cry of The  
Swamp; Miss Gotto's Haunted house/Cry of The Swamp;  
Select Timer Record/Remind setting mode.  
Remind  
Record  
Close  
or  
Switch off EPG.  
89  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
EPG (ELECTRONIC PROGRAMME GUIDE)  
Button Function in Record/Remind Setting Mode  
Sets a start or end time for recording, and sets only a start time for the reminder with the end time  
grayed out.  
This function is available only when recording equipment that use pin8 recording signalling has been  
connected to the TV-OUT(AV1) terminal, using a SCART cable.  
Recording function is only supported in the Digital mode and not in the Analogue mode.  
Manual Timer  
Switch off Manual Timer mode.  
Select the date to schedule.  
Wed. 12 Aug. 2009 13:46  
Wed. 12 Aug. 2009  
Sun. Mon. Tue.  
Wed.  
Thu.  
Fri.  
Sat.  
09  
16  
Select a schedule type  
Select Remind or Record function setting.  
Type  
StartTime  
End Time Programme  
st  
Record  
15  
:
09  
17  
:
30  
DTV 801 ANTV D...  
Close  
23  
30  
Select Type, Start Time, End time or  
Programme.  
Prev.  
OK  
Move  
Programme Guide  
OK  
Schedule List  
Exit  
YELLOW  
Change to Guide mode.  
BLUE  
Change to Schedule List mode.  
Save Timer Record/Remind.  
90  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Button Function in Schedule List Mode  
If you’ve created a schedule list, a scheduled programme is displayed at the scheduled time even  
when you are watching a different programme at the time.  
Currently recording item cannot be edited or deleted.  
Schedule List  
Page1/1  
Start Date  
Fri. 6 Apr. 2007 15:09  
Start Time  
16:00  
Title  
Repeat  
YELLOW  
Change to Manual Timer mode.  
6 May  
6 May  
Friend1  
Friend2  
Friend2  
16:00  
18:00  
oif
Modify  
or  
BLUE  
Change to Guide mode.  
Delete  
Remind  
DTV 19 Dave  
(Fri.)06/05/2007  
16:00  
Delete All  
Close  
Switch off Schedule List.  
Exit  
P
Move  
Modify/Delete  
Programme Guide  
Page Change  
Manual Timer  
Select your desired Option(Modify/Delete/  
Delete All).  
Select programme.  
Page Up/Down.  
91  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
PICTURE CONTROL  
PICTURE SIZE (ASPECT RATIO) CONTROL  
You can watch the screen in various picture formats; 16:9, Just Scan,  
Original, Full Wide, 4:3, 14:9, Zoom and Cinema Zoom.  
If a fixed image is displayed on the screen for a long time, that fixed  
image may become imprinted on the screen and remain visible.  
You can adjust the enlarge proportion using  
This function works in the following signal.  
button.  
1
You can also adjust Aspect Ratio in the  
PICTURE menu.  
Select Aspect Ratio.  
For Zoom Setting, select 14:9, Zoom and  
Cinema Zoom in Ratio Menu. After com-  
pleting Zoom Setting, the display goes  
back to Q.Menu.  
2
Select the desired picture format.  
• 16:9  
Original  
The following selection will allow you to adjust the pic-  
ture horizontally, in linear proportion, to fill the entire  
screen(useful for viewing 4:3 formatted DVDs).  
When your TV receives a wide screen signal it will auto-  
matically change to the picture format broadcast.  
Original  
Just Scan  
Full Wide  
Following Selection will lead to you view the  
picture of best quality without loss of original  
picture in high resolution image.  
When TV receives the wide screen signal,it will lead you  
to adjust the picture horizontally or vertically, in a linear  
proportion,to fill the entire screen fully.  
Note : If there is noise in original Picture, You  
can see the noise at the edge.  
4:3 and 14:9 video is supported in full screen without  
any video distortion through DTV input.  
Just Scan  
Full Wide  
92  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
4:3  
The following selection will allow you to view a picture  
with an original 4:3 aspect ratio.  
Zoom  
The following selection will allow you to view  
the picture without any alteration, while filling  
the entire screen. However, the top and bottom  
of the picture will be cropped.  
14:9  
You can view a picture format of 14:9 or a general TV  
programme in the 14:9 mode. The 14:9 screen is  
viewed in the same way as in 4:3, but is moved to the  
up and down.  
Cinema Zoom  
Choose Cinema Zoom when you want to  
enlarge the picture in correct proportion.  
Note:When enlarging or reducing the picture,  
the image may become distorted.  
or button: Adjust enlarge proportion of  
Cinema Zoom. The adjustment range is 1 to 16.  
or button: Move the screen.  
NOTE  
You can only select 4:3, 16:9 (Wide), 14:9, Zoom/Cinema Zoom in Component mode.  
You can only select 4:3, Original, 16:9 (Wide), 14:9, Zoom/Cinema Zoom in HDMI mode.  
You can only select 4:3, 16:9 (Wide) in RGB-PC, HDMI-PC mode only.  
In DTV/HDMI/Component (over 720p) mode, Just Scan is available.  
In Analogue/DTV/AV/Scart mode, Full Wide is available.  
93  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PICTURE CONTROL  
PICTURE WIZARD  
This feature lets you adjust the picture quality of the original image.  
Use this to calibrate the screen quality by adjusting the Black and White Level etc. General users can  
calibrate the screen quality by easily following each stage.  
When you adjust the image to Low, Recommended or High, you can see the changed result as an  
example.  
In RGB-PC/HDMI-PC/DVI-PC mode, the changed Colour, Tint and H/V Sharpness values are not  
applied.  
Picture Wizard  
PICTURE  
Move  
OK  
With Picture Wizard, you can adjust the picture quality of  
the original image.  
Aspect Ratio  
: 16:9  
Picture Wizard  
Energy Saving : Off  
Picture Mode : Standard  
• Backlight  
• Contrast  
• Brightness  
70  
100  
50  
Previous  
Next  
• If you stop the setting before the final stage,  
the changes will not be applied  
1
2
Select PICTURE.  
The adjustment value is saved to Expert1.  
Once the Picture Wizard sets the image  
quality, the Energy Saving is changed into  
Off.  
Select Picture Wizard.  
If the picture quality setting of Expert1 is  
changed, use the Picture Reset before  
entering the Picture Wizard to reset the  
picture quality setting.  
Adjust Standard(Black Level,  
White Level, Tint, Colour,  
Horizontal Sharpness, Vertical  
Sharpness, Backlight) or  
3
Standard : mode to set standard picture  
Preferred(Black Level, White  
Level, Tint, Colour, Sharpness,  
Dynamic Contrast, Colour  
Temperature, Backlight).  
quality.  
Preferred : mode to set user preferred  
picture quality rather than standard pic-  
ture.  
4
5
Select input source to apply  
the settings.  
Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.  
Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.  
94  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
ENERGY SAVING  
It reduces the TV’s power consumption.  
The default factory setting is adjusted to the comfortable level to be viewed at home.  
You can increase the brightness of your screen by adjusting the Energy Saving level or by setting  
the Picture Mode.  
When adjusting Energy Saving in MHEG mode, the Energy Saving setting is applied after MHEG is  
finished.  
Selecting ‘Screen Off’ while tuned to a radio station channel will reduce power consumption.  
PICTURE  
PICTURE  
Move  
OK  
Move  
OK  
Aspect Ratio  
: 16:9  
Aspect Ratio  
: 16:9  
Picture Wizard  
Picture Wizard  
Auto  
Off  
Energy Saving : Off  
Energy Saving : Off  
Picture Mode : Standard  
Picture Mode : Standard  
Minimum  
Medium  
• Backlight  
• Contrast  
70  
• Backlight  
• Contrast  
• Brightness  
7
10
5
100  
50  
Maximum  
Screen Off  
• Brightness  
1
2
3
Select PICTURE.  
Select  
Energy Saving.  
Select Auto(Only 32/42/46/52/60LD5 , 32LE3 , 32/37/42LE4  
32/37/42/47/55LE5 )., Off, Minimum , Medium, Maximum or Screen  
,
*** *** ***  
***  
Off.  
Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.  
Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.  
• When you select Screen Off, the screen will be turned off in 3 seconds and Screen Off will start.  
• If you adjust “Energy Saving-Auto, Maximum”, Backlight feature will not work.  
You can also adjust this feature by selecting Energy Saving button on the remote control.  
• When selecting Auto, Backlight is automatically adjusted through intelligent sensor according to the  
surrounding condition when intelligent sensor is in the TV. (Only 32/42/46/52/60LD5 , 32LE3  
,
*** ***  
32/37/42LE4 , 32/37/42/47/55LE5 ).  
***  
***  
95  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
PICTURE CONTROL  
PRESET PICTURE SETTINGS  
Picture Mode-Preset  
Vivid  
Strengthen the contrast, brightness, colour and sharpness for vivid picture.  
Standard The most general screen display status.  
Cinema  
Sport  
Optimizes video for watching movies.  
Optimizes video for watching sports events.  
Optimizes video for playing games.  
Game  
PICTURE  
PICTURE  
Move  
OK  
Move  
OK  
Aspect Ratio  
: 16:9  
Aspect Ratio  
: 16:9  
Picture Wizard  
Picture Wizard  
Intelligent Sensor  
Vivid  
Energy Saving : Off  
Energy Saving : Off  
Picture Mode  
: Standard  
Picture Mode  
: Standard  
• Backlight  
• Contrast  
• Brightness  
• Backlight  
• Contrast  
• Brightness  
t
a
n
d
rd  
a
70  
70  
Cinema  
Sport  
100  
50  
100  
50  
Game  
Expert1  
Expert2  
1
2
3
Select PICTURE.  
Select Picture Mode.  
Select Intelligent Sensor(Only 32/42/46/52/60LD5  
32LE3 , 32/37/42LE4 , 32/37/42/47/55LE5 ),  
*** *** ***  
,
***  
Vivid, Standard, Cinema, Sport or Game.  
Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.  
Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.  
Picture Mode adjusts the TV for the best picture appearance. Select the preset value in the  
Picture Mode menu based on the programme category.  
• When the Intelligent sensor function is on, the most suitable picture is automatically adjusted  
according to the surrounding conditions.  
You can also adjust Picture Mode in the Q. Menu.  
Intelligent Sensor : Adjusts picture according to the surrounding conditions.  
96  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
MANUAL PICTURE ADJUSTMENT  
Picture Mode-User option  
Backlight  
To control the brightness of the screen, adjust the brightness of LCD panel.  
Adjusting the backlight when setting the brightness of the set is recommended.  
Contrast  
Adjusts the signal level between black and white in the picture. You may use Contrast when the bright  
part of the picture is saturated.  
Brightness  
Adjusts the base level of the signal in the picture.  
Sharpness  
Adjusts the level of crispness in the edges between the light and dark areas of the picture.  
The lower the level, the softer the image.  
Colour  
Adjusts intensity of all colours.  
Tint  
Adjusts the balance between red and green levels.  
Colour Temp.  
Adjust to left direction to make a picture reddish or adjust to right direction to make a picture bluish.  
It is not available to use this function in “Intelligent Sensor” (Only 32/42/46/52/60LD5 , 32LE3  
,
*** ***  
32/37/42LE4 , 32/37/42/47/55LE5 ).  
***  
***  
PICTURE  
PICTURE  
Move  
OK  
Move  
OK  
Aspect Ratio  
: 16:9  
Aspect Ratio  
: 16:9  
Picture Wizard  
Picture Wizard  
Intelligent Sensor  
Vivid  
Energy Saving : Off  
Energy Saving : Off  
Picture Mode  
: Standard  
Picture Mode  
: Standard  
• Backlight  
• Contrast  
• Brightness  
• Backlight  
• Contrast  
• Brightness  
t
a
n
d
rd  
a
70  
70  
Cinema  
100  
50  
100  
50  
Sport  
Game  
Expert1  
Expert2  
1
2
3
Benefits of using Backlight  
Select PICTURE.  
- The electricity consumption is reduced by  
up to 60 %.  
- The black brightness is reduced. (As the  
black has greater depth, you can enjoy a  
better quality definition.)  
Select Picture Mode.  
Select Vivid, Standard, Cinema,  
Sport or Game.  
- You can adjust brightness with maintaining  
original signal resolution.  
Select Backlight, Contrast,  
Brightness, Sharpness, Colour,  
4
5
Tint or Colour Temp.  
.
Make appropriate adjustments.  
Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.  
Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.  
NOTE  
You cannot adjust colour, sharpness and tint in the RGB-PC/HDMI-PC mode.  
H Sharpness, V  
When the Expert 1/2 is selected, you can select Backlight, Contrast, Brightness,  
97  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
PICTURE CONTROL  
PICTURE IMPROVEMENT TECHNOLOGY  
You can calibrate the screen for each Picture Mode or set the video value according to the special  
video screen.  
You can set the video value differently for each input.  
To reset to the factory default screen after making adjustments to each video mode, execute the  
“Picture Reset” function for each Picture Mode.  
Image shown may differ from your TV.  
PICTURE  
Move  
OK  
PICTURE  
Move  
OK  
• Sharpness  
• Colour  
70  
60  
0
• Sh
arpness  
• Colour  
Dynamic Contrast  
Medium  
Medium  
Off  
Dynamic Colour  
R
G
C
• Tint  
• Tint  
Clear White  
W
• Colour Temp.  
0
• Colour Temp
Skin Colour  
0
• Advanced Control  
• Advanced C
Noise Reduction  
• Picture Reset  
Medium  
Medium  
Medium  
Auto  
• Picture Rese
• TruMotion  
• Screen  
Digital Noise Reduction  
Gamma  
• TruMotion  
• Screen  
Black Level  
Close  
1
2
Select PICTURE.  
Select Advanced Control.  
Select your desired Source.:  
3
4
Dynamic Contrast, Dynamic Colour, Clear White, Skin Colour, Noise Reduction,  
Digital Noise Reduction, Gamma, Black Level, Eye Care, Real Cinema, Colour  
Gamut or xvYCC. (Refer to p. 100 to 101)  
Make appropriate adjustments.  
Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.  
Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.  
98  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
EXPERT PICTURE CONTROL  
By segmenting categories, Expert1 and Expert2 provide more categories which users can set as they  
see fit, offering the optimal picture quality for users.  
This may also be used to help a professional optimize the TV performance using specific videos.  
Image shown may differ from your TV.  
PICTURE  
Move  
OK  
PICTURE  
Dynamic Contrast  
Medium  
• H
Sharp
Noise Reduction  
Aspect Ratio  
: 16:9  
Medium  
Medium  
Auto  
• V Sharp
Digital Noise Reduction  
Picture Wizard  
Intelligent Sensor  
Vivid  
• Colour  
• Tint  
Energy Saving : Off  
Picture Mode  
Black Level  
:
Expert
Standard  
Real Cinema  
On  
• Expert C
• Backlight  
• Contrast  
• Brightness  
Cinema  
Colour Gamut  
EBU  
• Picture R
Sport  
Edge Enhancer  
High  
• TruMotion  
• Screen  
Game  
xvYCC  
Auto  
Off  
Expert1  
Expert Pattern  
Expert2  
Close  
1
2
3
4
5
6
Select PICTURE.  
Select Picture Mode.  
Select  
Expert1 or  
Expert2.  
Select Expert Control.  
Select your desired Source.  
Make appropriate adjustments.  
Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.  
Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.  
99  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
PICTURE CONTROL  
*This feature is not available for all models.  
Adjusts the contrast to keep it at the best level according to the brightness of  
Dynamic Contrast  
(Off/Low/Medium/High)  
the screen. The picture is improved by making bright parts brighter and dark  
parts darker.  
Adjusts screen colours so that they look livelier, richer and clearer. This fea-  
ture enhances hue, saturation and luminance so that red, blue, green and  
white look more vivid.  
Dynamic Colour  
(Off/Low/High )  
Skin Colour  
(-5 5)  
to  
Adjusts skin colour of the picture so that user can set his favourite skin colour.  
Reduces screen noise without compromising video quality.  
Reduces noise regarding MPEG compressed video.  
Noise Reduction  
(Off/Low/Medium/High/  
Auto(In Analogue Mode  
Only))  
Digital Noise Reduction  
(Low/Medium/High/Off)  
Gamma  
You can adjust brightness of dark area and middle gray level area of the picture.  
(Advanced Control:  
Low/Medium/High  
Expert Control:  
1.9/2.2/2.4 )  
Low/1.9 : Makes dark and middle gray level area of the picture brighter.  
Medium/2.2 : Expresses original picture levels.  
High/2.4: Make dark and middle gray level area of the picture darker.  
Low : The picture of the screen gets darker.  
High : The picture of the screen gets brighter.  
Auto : Sets black level of the screen to High or Low automatically according to  
the input signal level.  
Black Level  
(Low/High/Auto)  
Set black level of the screen to proper level.  
This function enables to select 'Low' or 'High' in the following mode:  
AV(NTSC-M), HDMI or Component. Otherwise, 'Black level' is set to 'Auto'.  
Clear White  
(Off/Low/High)  
Makes the white area of the screen brighter and clearer.  
*This feature is not available for all models.  
Adjusts the brightness of the screen automatically to the best level for  
eyes when the screen is too bright.  
Eye Care  
This feature is disable in “Picture Mode-Vivid, Cinema, Expert1, Expert2,  
(Low/High/Off)  
Intelligent Sensor(Only 32/42/46/52/60LD5 , 32LE3 , 32/37/42LE4  
,
*** *** ***  
32/37/42/47/55LE5 )”.  
***  
You can watch a cinema-like video by eliminating judder effect.  
Use this function when you watch film-originated movie contents.  
This function can work when TruMotion is off.  
Real Cinema  
(On/Off)  
100  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Standard : Mode to use original colour area regardless of the display char-  
acteristics.  
Colour Gamut  
(Advanced Control:  
Wide/Standard)  
Wide: Mode to use maximum colour area of the TV display.  
Maximize the utilization for colour area that can be expressed.  
Standard : Mode to use original colour area regardless of the display char-  
acteristics.  
Colour Gamut  
(Expert Control: EBU/  
SMPTE/BT709/Wide/  
Standard)  
Wide : Mode to use maximum colour area of the TV display.  
EBU : Mode to display EBU colour area.  
SMPTE : Mode to display SMPTE colour area.  
BT709 : Mode to display BT709 colour area.  
Edge Enhancer  
(Off/Low/High)  
Makes the edge of the picture clearer and distinctive.  
This function can use in “Picture Mode-Expert.”  
*This feature is not available for all models.  
xvYCC  
This is the function to express richer colour.  
(Auto/off/on)  
This function is enabled in "Picture mode - Cinema, Expert" when xvYCC sig-  
nal is inputted through HDMI  
Expert Pattern  
This is the pattern necessary for checking the picture of Digital TV.  
(Off/Pattern1/Pattern2) This function is enabled in "Picture Mode - Expert" when you watch DTV.  
Colour Filter  
This is the function to filter the specific colours of the video.  
You can use the RGB filter to set colour saturation and hue accurately.  
(Off/Red/Green/Blue)  
This is the function to adjust the overall colour of the screen to the feeling you want.  
a. • Method : 2 Points  
Pattern: Inner, Outer  
Red/Green/Blue Contrast, Red/Green/Blue Brightness:  
The adjustment range is -50 +50.  
to  
b. Method : 10 point IRE  
Colour Temperature  
(Medium/Warm/Cool)  
Pattern: Inner / Outer  
IRE (Institute of Radio Engineers) is the unit to display the size of the video sig-  
nal and can be set among 10, 20, 30 100. You can adjust Red, Green or Blue  
to  
according to each setting.  
Luminance: This function displays calculated luminance value for 2.2 gamma.  
You can input luminance value you want at 100 IRE, than the target luminance  
value for 2.2 gamma is displayed at every 10 steps from 10 IRE to 90 IRE.  
Red/Green/Blue: The adjustment range is -50 +50.  
to  
As the tool used by the experts to make adjustments by using the test pat-  
terns, this does not affect other colours but can be used to selectively  
adjust the 6 colour areas (Red/Green/Blue/Cyan/Magenta/Yellow).  
Colour difference may not be distinctive even when you make the adjust-  
ments for the general video.  
Colour Management  
System  
Adjusts Red/Green/Blue/Yellow/Cyan/Magenta.  
Red/Green/Blue/Yellow/Cyan, Magenta Colour : The adjustment  
range is -30  
+30.  
to  
Red/Green/Blue/Yellow/Cyan/Magenta Tint : The adjustment  
range is -30 +30.  
to  
This feature is disable in RGB-PC and HDMI (PC) mode.  
101  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PICTURE CONTROL  
PICTURE RESET  
Settings of the selected picture modes return to the default factory settings.  
PICTURE  
PICTURE  
Move  
OK  
Move  
OK  
• Sh
arpness  
• Colour  
70  
60  
0
• Sh
arpness  
• Colour  
• Tin
70  
60  
R
G
C
• Tint  
All picture setting will be reset.  
?
W
• Colour Temp.  
0
• Co
Continue?  
• Advanced Control  
• Picture Reset  
• Ad
• Pic
Yes  
No  
• TruMotion  
• Screen  
• TruMotion  
• Screen  
1
2
3
4
Select PICTURE.  
Select Picture Reset.  
Select Yes.  
Initialize the adjusted value.  
Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.  
Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.  
102  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TRUMOTION  
(Only 32/42/46/52/60LD5 , 32/37/42/47/55LE5 )  
*** ***  
It is used for the best picture quality without any motion blur or judder when you enter a quick image  
or Film Source.  
High : Provide smoother picture movement.  
Low : Provide smooth picture movement. Use this setting for standard use.  
Off : Turn off TruMotion Operation.  
User : User can adjust Judder and Blur level in TruMotion Operation, separately.  
- Judder : Adjust noise of the screen.  
- Blur : Adjust after-image of the screen.  
This feature is disable in RGB-PC,HDMI-PC mode.  
If you enable "TruMotion", noise may appear on the screen.  
If this occurs, set "TruMotion" to "Off".  
If you select “Picture Mode-Game ”, set “TruMotion" to "Off".  
PICTURE  
Move  
OK  
• Sharpness  
• Colour  
70  
60  
0
TruMotion  
Judder  
Blur  
Low  
R
G
C
• Tint  
3
3
W
• Colour Temp.  
0
• Advanced Control  
• Picture Reset  
OK  
• TruMotion  
• Screen  
1
2
3
Select PICTURE.  
Select TruMotion.  
Select Low, High, User or Off.  
4
Make appropriate adjustments.  
Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.  
Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.  
103  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
PICTURE CONTROL  
POWER INDICATOR  
Adjust the power/standby indicator light on the front of the TV.  
Standby Light  
Determines whether to set the indicator light on the front of the TV to On or Off in standby mode.  
Power Light  
Determines whether to set the indicator light on the front of the TV to On or Off when the power turns  
on.  
OPTION  
OPTION  
Move  
OK  
Move  
OK  
Language(Language)  
Language(Language)  
Country  
: UK  
Country  
: UK  
Disability Assistance  
Power Indicator  
Factory Reset  
Set ID  
Disability Assistance  
Power Indicator  
Factory Reset  
Set ID  
Standby Light  
Power Light  
On  
On  
: 1  
: 1  
: Hom
Mode Setting  
: Home Use  
Mode Setting  
Close  
1
2
3
4
Select OPTION.  
Select Power Indicator.  
Select Standby Light or Power Light.  
Select your desired Source.  
Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.  
Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.  
104  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
MODE SETTING  
We recommend setting the TV to “Home Use ” mode for the best picture in your home environment.  
Store Demo ” mode is an optimal setting for displaying at stores.  
OPTION  
OPTION  
Move  
OK  
Move  
OK  
Language(Language)  
Language(Language)  
Country  
: UK  
Country  
: UK  
Disability Assistance  
Power Indicator  
Factory Reset  
Set ID  
Disability Assistance  
Power Indicator  
Factory Reset  
Set ID  
Selecting the environment.  
Choose the setting mode you want.  
Select [Home Use] to use this TV at home. To use  
this TV at store, select [Store Demo].  
: 1  
: 1  
Mode Setting  
Mode Setting  
: Home
: Home Use  
Store Demo  
Off  
Home Use  
Demo Mode  
Close  
1
2
3
4
Select OPTION.  
Select Mode Setting.  
Select Store Demo or Home Use.  
Save.  
Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.  
Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.  
105  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
PICTURE CONTROL  
DEMO MODE  
It is not possible to use Demo Mode in Home Use mode.  
In Store Demo, Demo Mode is automatically set to On.  
Once Demo Mode is set to Off in Store Demo, Demo Mode does not run and only the screen is  
reset.  
The screen is reset automatically after 5 minutes in Demo Mode.  
OPTION  
Move  
OK  
OPTION  
Move  
OK  
Language(Language)  
Language(Language)  
Country  
: UK  
Country  
: UK  
Disability Assistance  
Power Indicator  
Factory Reset  
Set ID  
Disability Assistance  
Power Indicator  
Factory Reset  
Set ID  
Selecting the environment.  
Choose the setting mode you want.  
Select [Store Demo] to use this TV in store.  
To use this TV at home, select [Home Use].  
: 1  
: 1  
Mode Setting  
: Home
Mode Setting  
: Home Use  
Store Demo  
On  
Home Use  
Demo Mode  
Close  
1
2
3
4
5
Select OPTION.  
Select Mode Setting.  
Select Store Demo.  
Select On.  
Move to the previous menu screen.  
If you want to stop the demo, press any button.  
(except for MUTE, + , - button)  
Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.  
Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.  
106  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SOUND & LANGUAGE CONTROL  
AUTO VOLUME LEVELER  
Auto Volume automatically remains on the same level of volume if you change programmes.  
Because each broadcasting station has its own signal conditions, volume adjustment may be needed  
every time the channel is changed. This feature allows users to enjoy stable volume levels by making  
automatic adjustments for each programme.  
If sound quality or volume is not at the level you want, it is recommended to use a separate home the-  
ater system or amp to cope with different user environments.  
Move  
OK  
Move  
OK  
AUDIO  
AUDIO  
Off  
Auto Volume  
: Off  
Auto Volume  
: Off  
On  
Clear Voice II  
Balance  
: Off  
3
Clear Voice II  
Balance  
: Off  
3
L
R
L
R
0
0
Sound Mode  
: Standard  
Sound Mode  
: Standard  
• Infinite Sound : Off  
• Infinite Sound : Off  
• Treble  
• Bass  
50  
50  
• Treble  
• Bass  
50  
50  
• Reset  
• Reset  
1
2
3
Select AUDIO.  
Select Auto Volume.  
Select On or Off.  
Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.  
Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.  
107  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SOUND & LANGUAGE CONTROL  
CLEAR VOICE II  
By differentiating the human sound range from others, it helps users listen to human voices better.  
Move  
OK  
AUDIO  
Move  
OK  
AUDIO  
Auto Volume  
: Off  
Auto Volume  
: Off  
Clear Voice II  
Off  
ClearVoiceII  
:Off  
3  
ClearVoiceII  
:Off  
3  
Level  
3
Balance  
-
+
L
R
Balance  
0
Sound Mode  
: Standard  
Sound Mode  
: Standard  
Close  
• Infinite Sound :
• Infinite Sound : Off  
• Treble  
• Bass  
50  
50  
• Treble  
• Bass  
50  
50  
• Reset  
• Reset  
1
2
3
If you select “On” for Clear Voice II,  
Infinite Sound feature will not work.  
Select AUDIO.  
Select levels from ‘-6’ to ’+6’.  
Select Clear Voice II.  
Select On or Off.  
Adjustment for Clear Voice Level With selecting On  
4
Select Level.  
5
Make desired adjustment.  
Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.  
Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.  
108  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
PRESET SOUND SETTINGS-SOUND MODE  
You can select your preferred sound setting; Standard, Music, Cinema, Sport or Game and you can  
also adjust the Treble, Bass.  
Sound Mode lets you enjoy the best sound without any Special adjustment as the TV sets the appro-  
priate sound options based on the programme content.  
Standard, Music, Cinema, Sport and Game are preset for optimum sound quality at the factory.  
Standard Offers standard-quality sound.  
Music  
Cinema  
Sport  
Optimizes sound for listening to music.  
Optimizes sound for watching movies.  
Optimizes sound for watching sports events.  
Optimizes sound for playing games.  
Game  
Move  
OK  
Move  
OK  
AUDIO  
AUDIO  
Auto Volume  
Clear Voice II  
Balance  
: Off  
: Off  
Auto Volume  
: Off  
: Off  
3
Clear Voice II  
Balance  
3
L
R
Standard  
0
Music  
Cinema  
Sport  
SoundMode  
:Standard  
SoundMode  
:Standard  
• Infinite Sound : Off  
• Infinite Sound
• Treble  
• Bass  
50  
50  
• Treble  
• Bass  
Game  
• Re
set  
• Reset  
You can also adjust Sound Mode in the Q.  
Menu.  
1
2
3
Select AUDIO.  
Select Sound Mode.  
Select Standard, Music, Cinema, Sport or  
Game.  
Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.  
Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.  
109  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SOUND & LANGUAGE CONTROL  
SOUND SETTING ADJUSTMENT -USER MODE  
Move  
OK  
Move  
OK  
AUDIO  
AUDIO  
Auto Volume  
: Off  
: Off  
Auto Volume  
: Off  
: Off  
Clear Voice II  
Balance  
3
Clear Voice II  
Balance  
3
L
R
Standard(User)  
0
Music  
Cinema  
Sport  
SoundMode  
:Standard(User)  
• Infinite Sound : Off  
SoundMode  
:Standard(Use
• Infinite Sound
• Treble  
• Bass  
50  
50  
• Treble  
• Bass  
Game  
• Reset  
• Reset  
1
2
3
4
5
Select AUDIO.  
Select Sound Mode.  
Select Standard, Music, Cinema, Sport or  
Game.  
Select Treble or Bass.  
Set the desired sound level.  
Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.  
Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.  
INFINITE SOUND  
Select this option to sound realistic.  
1
Infinite Sound : Infinite Sound is a patented  
LG proprietary sound processing technology  
that strives immersive 5.1 surround sound  
impression with front two loudspeakers.  
Select AUDIO.  
2
Select Infinite Sound.  
3
Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.  
Select On or Off.  
Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.  
110  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
BALANCE  
You can adjust the sound balance of the speakers to preferred levels.  
Move  
OK  
Move  
OK  
AUDIO  
AUDIO  
Auto Volume  
Clear Voice II  
: Off  
: Off  
Auto Volume  
Clear Voice II  
: Off  
: Off  
3
3
L
R
L
R
Balance  
0
Balance  
Sound Mode  
0
Balance  
Sound Mode  
: Standard  
: Standard  
Close  
• Infinite Sound : Off  
• Infinite Sound
• Treble  
• Bass  
50  
50  
• Treble  
• Bass  
50  
50  
• Re
set  
• Reset  
1
2
3
Select AUDIO.  
Select Balance.  
Make desired adjustment.  
Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.  
Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.  
111  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SOUND & LANGUAGE CONTROL  
TV SPEAKERS ON/ OFF SETUP  
You can adjust the TV internal speaker status.  
In AV, COMPONENT, RGB and HDMI1 with HDMI to DVI cable, the TV speaker can be operational  
even when there is no video signal.  
If you wish to use an external Hi-Fi system, turn off the TV’s internal speakers.  
Move  
OK  
Move  
OK  
AUDIO  
AUDIO  
Sound Mode  
: Standard  
• Infinite Sound : Off  
Sound Mode  
: Standard  
• Infinite Sound : Off  
• Treble  
• Bass  
• Reset  
: PCM  
:On  
50  
50  
• Treble  
• Bass  
• Reset  
: PCM  
:On  
50  
50  
Digital Audio Out  
Digital Audio Out  
Off  
On  
TVSpeaker  
TVSpeaker  
DTV Audio Setting : Auto  
DTV Audio Setting : Auto  
1
2
3
Select AUDIO.  
Select TV Speaker.  
Select On or Off.  
Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.  
Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.  
NOTE  
When the TV speaker is turned off while the Simplink home theater is operating, the sound output automati-  
cally switches to the Home theater speaker, but when the TV speaker is turned on, the sound output the  
TV speaker.  
Some menus in AUDIO are disabled when TV Speaker is set to Off.  
112  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
DTV AUDIO SETTING (IN DIGITAL MODE ONLY)  
When different audio types exist in an input signal, this function allows you to select the audio type  
you want.  
Move  
OK  
Move  
OK  
AUDIO  
AUDIO  
Sound Mode  
: Standard  
• Infinite Sound : Off  
Sound Mode  
: Standard  
• Infinite Sound : Off  
• Treble  
• Bass  
• Reset  
: PCM  
: On  
50  
50  
• Treble  
• Bass  
• Reset  
: PCM  
: On  
50  
50  
Auto  
HE-AAC  
Digital Audio Out  
TV Speaker  
Digital Audio Out  
TV Speaker  
Dolby Digital+  
Dolby Digital  
MPEG  
DTV Audio Setting : Auto  
DTV Audio Setting :Auto  
1
2
3
Select AUDIO.  
Select DTV Audio Setting.  
Select Auto, HE-AAC, Dolby Digital +, Dolby  
Digital or MPEG.  
Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.  
Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.  
Auto: Automatically outputs in the order HE-AAC > Dolby Digital+ > Dolby Digital > MPEG.  
(Except for Italy)  
Auto: Automatically outputs in the order HE-AAC > Dolby Digital+ > MPEG > Dolby Digital.  
(Only Italy)  
HE-AAC, Dolby Digital+, Dolby Digital, MPEG: Allows users to select the audio type they want.  
ex) If MPEG is selected, MPEG is always outputted.  
If MPEG is not supported, another audio type is set in that order.  
• Refer to p. 120 to 121 (Audio Language Selection)  
113  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SOUND & LANGUAGE CONTROL  
SELECTING DIGITAL AUDIO OUT  
This function allows you to select your preferred Digital Audio Output.  
When Dolby Digital is available, selecting Auto in the Digital Audio Out menu will set SPDIF(Sony  
Philips Digital InterFace) output to Dolby Digital.  
If Auto is selected in the digital audio out menu when Dolby Digital is not available, SPDIF output will  
be PCM(Pulse-code modulation).  
Even if both Dolby Digital and Audio language have been set in a channel which broadcast Dolby  
Digital Audio, only Dolby Digital will be played.  
Move  
OK  
AUDIO  
Move  
OK  
AUDIO  
Sound Mode  
: Standard  
• Infinite Sound : Off  
Sound Mode  
: Standard  
• Infinite Sound : Off  
• Treble  
• Bass  
50  
50  
• Treble  
• Bass  
50  
50  
• Reset  
• Reset  
Auto  
PCM  
: PCM  
Digital Audio Out  
TV Speaker  
: PCM  
Digital Audio Out  
TV Speaker  
: On  
: On  
DTV Audio Setting : Auto  
DTV Audio Setting : Auto  
1
2
3
Manufactured under license from  
Dolby Laboratories. Dolby and the  
double-D symbol are trademarks of  
Dolby Laboratories.  
Select AUDIO.  
Select Digital Audio Out.  
• There is a possibility that when HDMI mode,  
some DVD players do not make SPDIF sound.  
At that time, set the output of the digital audio of  
the DVD player to PCM. (In HDMI, Dolby Digital  
Plus is not supported).  
Select Auto or PCM.  
Item  
Audio Input  
MPEG  
Digital Audio output  
PCM  
Auto(Speaker On) Dolby Digital  
Dolby Digital  
Dolby Digital  
PCM  
Dolby Digital Plus  
HE-AAC  
MPEG  
PCM  
Dolby Digital  
Dolby Digital Plus  
HE-AAC  
Dolby Digital  
Dolby Digital  
Dolby Digital  
Auto(Speaker Off)  
PCM  
All  
PCM  
Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.  
Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.  
114  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
AUDIO RESET  
Settings of the selected Sound Mode return to the default factory settings.  
Move  
OK  
Move  
OK  
AUDIO  
AUDIO  
Sound Mode  
: Standard  
• Infinite Sound : Off  
Sound Mode  
: Standard  
• Infinite Sound : Off  
• Tr
• Treble  
• Bass  
• Reset  
: PCM  
: On  
50  
50  
All audio settings will be resetted.  
?
• B
• R
: P
: On  
Continue?  
Digital Audio Out  
TV Speaker  
Digital Audio Out  
TV Speaker  
Yes  
No  
DTV Audio Setting : Auto  
DTV Audio Setting : Auto  
1
2
3
4
Select AUDIO.  
Select Reset.  
Select Yes.  
Initialize the adjusted value.  
Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.  
Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.  
115  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SOUND & LANGUAGE CONTROL  
AUDIO DESCRIPTION (IN DIGITAL MODE ONLY)  
This function is for the blind, and provides explanatory audio describing the current situation in a TV  
programme in addition to the basic audio.  
When Audio Description On is selected, basic audio and Audio Description are provided only for those  
programmes that have Audio Description included.  
Volume  
Beep  
Changes the Audio Description volume  
Beeps when a programme with Audio Description information is selected  
OPTION  
OPTION  
Move  
OK  
Move  
OK  
Language(Language)  
Country : UK  
Language(Language)  
Country : UK  
Hard of Hearing(  
)
Off  
On  
Disability Assistance  
Disability Assistance  
Audio Description  
• Volume  
Power Indicator  
Factory Reset  
Set ID  
Power Indicator  
Factory Reset  
Set ID  
-
+
0
: 1  
: 1  
• Beep  
Off  
Mode Setting  
: Home Use  
Mode Setting  
: Hom
Close  
1
2
3
Select OPTION.  
Select Disability Assistance.  
Select Audio Description.  
Adjustment for Audio Description Volume With selecting On  
4
Select Volume or Beep.  
5
Make desired adjustment.  
Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.  
Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.  
116  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
I/II  
STEREO/DUAL RECEPTION (IN ANALOGUE MODE ONLY)  
When a programme is selected, the sound information for the station appears with the programme  
number and station name.  
1
Select Audio or Audio Language  
.
2
Select the sound output.  
Broadcast  
Mono  
On Screen Display  
MONO  
STEREO  
Stereo  
Dual  
DUAL I, DUAL II, DUAL I+II  
Mono sound selection  
If the stereo signal is weak in stereo reception, you can switch to mono. In mono reception, the  
clarity of sound is improved.  
Language selection for dual language broadcast  
If a programme can be received in two languages (dual language), you can switch to DUAL I,  
DUAL II or DUAL I+II.  
DUAL I  
DUAL II  
Sends the primary broadcast language to the loudspeakers.  
Sends the secondary broadcast language to the loudspeakers.  
DUAL I+II Sends a separate language to each loudspeaker.  
117  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SOUND & LANGUAGE CONTROL  
NICAM RECEPTION (IN ANALOGUE MODE ONLY)  
If the TV is equipped with a receiver for NICAM reception, high quality NICAM (Near Instantaneous  
Companding Audio Multiplex) digital sound can be received.  
Sound output can be selected according to the type of broadcast received.  
1
When NICAM mono is received, you can select NICAM MONO or FM MONO.  
When NICAM stereo is received, you can select NICAM STEREO or FM MONO.  
2
If the stereo signal is weak, switch to FM MONO.  
When NICAM dual is received, you can select NICAM DUAL I, NICAM DUAL II or  
3
NICAM DUAL I+II or FM MONO.  
SPEAKER SOUND OUTPUT SELECTION  
In AV, Component, RGB and HDMI mode, you can select output sound for the left and  
right loudspeakers.  
Select the sound output.  
L+R: Audio signal from audio L input is sent to the left loudspeaker and audio signal from  
audio R input is sent to the right loudspeaker.  
L+L: Audio signal from audio L input is sent to left and right loudspeakers.  
R+R: Audio signal from audio R input is sent to left and right loudspeakers.  
118  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
ON-SCREEN MENU LANGUAGE / COUNTRY  
SELECTION  
The installation guide menu appears on the TV screen when it is switched on for the first time.  
1
Select your desired language.  
2
Select your country.  
* If you want to change Language/ Country selection  
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
3
4
5
Select OPTION.  
Select OPTION.  
Select Country.  
Select your country.  
Select Yes or No.  
Select Language(Language).  
Select Menu Language.  
Select your desired language.  
Save.  
Save.  
Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.  
Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.  
NOTE  
If you do not finish the set-up Installation Guide by pressing BACK or if you time out on the OSD (On  
Screen Display) the installation menu will continuously appear until the set up is completed whenever the  
TV is switched on.  
If you select the wrong local country, teletext may not appear correctly on the screen and some problems  
may occur during teletext operation.  
The CI (Common Interface) function may not be applied based on country broadcasting circumstances.  
DTV mode control buttons may not function based on country broadcasting circumstances.  
In country that Digital broadcasting regulation isn’t fixed, some DTV function may not work depending on  
digital broadcasting circumstances.  
The Country Setting "UK" should only be activated in UK.  
If the country setting is set to "--", European terrestrial digital standard broadcasting programmes are avail-  
able, but some DTV functions may not work properly.  
119  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SOUND & LANGUAGE CONTROL  
LANGUAGE SELECTION  
The Audio function allows selection of a preferred language.  
If audio data in a selected language is not broadcast, the default language audio will be played.  
Use the Subtitle function when two or more subtitle languages are broadcast. If subtitle data in a  
selected language is not broadcast, the default language subtitle will be displayed.  
When the languages you selected as the primary for Audio Language and Subtitle Language and Text  
Language are not supported, you can select language in secondary category.  
In Digital mode, use the Text language function when two or more Text languages are broadcast. If tele-  
text data in a selected language is not broadcast, the default Text language page will be displayed.  
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
3
4
Select OPTION.  
Select OPTION.  
Select Language(Language).  
Select Disability Assistance.  
Select Audio Language, Subtitle  
Language or Text Language(Except  
for UK).  
Select Hard of Hearing(  
).  
Select your desired language.  
Select On or Off.  
Save.  
Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.  
120  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Audio Language OSD Information  
Display  
Status  
< Audio Language Selection >  
N.A  
Not Available  
MPEG Audio  
When two or more audio languages are broadcast, you can  
select the audio language.  
Dolby Digital Audio  
Audio for “Visual Impaired”  
Audio for “Hearing Impaired”  
Dolby Digital Plus Audio  
HE-AAC Audio  
1
Select Audio or Audio Language  
.
HE-AAC  
2
Select an audio language.  
< Subtitle Language Selection >  
Subtitle Language OSD Information  
When two or more subtitle languages are broadcast, you  
can select the subtitle language with the SUBTITLE button  
on the remote control.  
Display  
N.A  
Status  
Not Available  
Teletext Subtitle  
Subtitle for “Hard of Hearing”  
Press the  
button to select a subtitle language.  
- The audio/subtitles can be displayed in a simpler form with 1 to 3 characters broadcast by the service pro-  
vider.  
- When you select supplementary Audio (Audio for “Visual/Hearing Impaired”) the TV may output a part of  
the Main audio.  
121  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TIME SETTING  
CLOCK SETUP  
The clock is set automatically when receiving a digital signal in Auto mode. You can set the clock  
manually in Manual mode.  
You must set the time correctly before using on/off timer function.  
The TV time is set by the time offset information based on Time Zone and GMT (Greenwich Mean  
Time) which is received with the broadcast signal and the time is set automatically by a digital signal.  
When if the city name in Time Zone is changed into offset, you can change time by 1 hour.  
Time Zone menu can be changed in Auto mode.  
TIME  
TIME  
Move  
OK  
Move  
OK  
Clock  
Clock  
Auto  
Off Time  
: Off  
Off Time  
Date  
Month  
3
On Time  
: Off  
: Off  
On Time  
Mar.  
2008  
Sleep Timer  
Sleep Timer  
Year  
Hour  
16  
09  
Minute  
Time Zone  
London  
GMT  
Close  
1
2
3
4
Time Zone  
Select TIME.  
Magadan, Kamchatka  
Vladivostok  
Yakutsk  
Irkutsk  
Krasnoyarsk  
Omsk  
Yekaterinburg  
Moscow, Samara  
Kaliningrad  
Select Clock.  
Select Auto or Manual.  
Select either the year, month, date,  
time or Time Zone option.  
This Table means the Time Zone table of 9  
area of Russia, and when the user selects the  
Time Zone for his or her area, it automatically  
sets the time for the corresponding area.  
5
Set the year, month, date, time or Time  
Zone option.  
However, even though the user selected his or  
her area, if the broadcasting station’s local  
time offset is not offered, or if the region infor-  
mation does not match, then the user may  
select the Offset from the Time Zone to set the  
correct time.  
Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.  
Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.  
122  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
AUTO ON/OFF TIME SETTING  
The Off time function automatically switches the TV to standby at a preset time.  
Two hours after the TV is switched on by the on time function it will automatically switch back to stand-  
by mode unless a button has been pressed.(Except for 19/22/26/32LD350C-ZA, 32/37/42/47LD420C-  
ZA, 32/37/42/47/55LE531C-ZA)  
The Off time function overrides the On time function if both are set to the same time.  
The TV must be in standby mode for the On time to work.  
TIME  
TIME  
Move  
OK  
Move  
OK  
Clock  
Clock  
1 Mar. 2007 16:09  
Off Time  
On Time  
Sleep Timer  
: Off  
Off Time  
On Time  
Sleep Timer  
:
:
Repeat  
Off  
00  
: Off  
: Off  
Hour  
:
Minute  
00  
Input  
Antenna  
TV1  
Programme  
Volume  
30  
Close  
1
2
3
To cancel On/Off Time function, select Off.  
Select TIME.  
For On Time function only  
1
Select Off Time or On Time.  
Select Input.  
2
Select the input source.  
Select Repeat.  
3
4
5
Select Off, Once, Daily, Mon. ~ Fri.,  
Mon. ~ Sat., Sat. ~ Sun. or Sun..  
Set the programme.  
4
Adjust volume level at switch-on.  
Set the hour.  
6
Set the minutes.  
Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.  
Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.  
123  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TIME SETTING  
SLEEP TIMER SETTING  
You do not have to remember to switch the TV off before you go to sleep.  
The sleep timer automatically switches the TV to standby after the preset time has elapsed.  
1
Select Sleep Timer.  
2
Select Off, 10, 20, 30, 60, 90, 120, 180 or 240 min.  
When you switch the TV off, the preset sleep timer is cancelled.  
You can also adjust Sleep Timer in the TIME menu.  
124  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
PARENTAL CONTROL / RATINGS  
SET PASSWORD & LOCK SYSTEM  
Enter the password, press ‘0’,‘0’,‘0’,‘0’ on the remote control handset.  
When France is selected for Country, password is not ‘0’,‘0’,‘0’,‘0’ but ‘1’,’2’,’3’,’4’.  
When France is selected for Country, password cannot be set as ‘0’,‘0’,‘0’,‘0’ .  
If a channel is locked, enter the password to unlock it temporarily.  
LOCK  
LOCK  
Move  
OK  
Move  
OK  
Set Password  
Set Password  
Off  
: Off  
: Off  
Lock System  
Lock System  
On  
Block Programme  
Block Programme  
Parental Guidance: Blocking Off  
Parental Guidance: Blocking Off  
Input Block  
: Off  
Input Block  
: Off  
Key Lock  
Key Lock  
1
2
3
4
Select LOCK.  
If you forget your password, press ‘0’, ‘3’,  
‘2’, ‘5’ on the remote control handset.  
Select Lock System.  
Select On.  
Set the password.  
Input a 4-digit password.  
5
Be sure to remember this number!  
Re-enter new password for confirm.  
Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.  
Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.  
125  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
PARENTAL CONTROL / RATINGS  
BLOCK PROGRAMME  
Blocks any programme that you do not want to watch or that you do not want your children to watch.  
It is available to use this function in Lock System On”.  
Enter a password to watch a blocked programme.  
Page 1/1  
C
Favourite Group :  
DTV  
Programme Edit  
RADIO  
TV  
2
5
8
Nine Digital HD  
7 HD Digital  
3
6
9
Nine Guide  
7 Digital 1  
7 Guide  
1
4
7
Nine Digital  
7 Digital  
LOCK  
Move  
OK  
Set Password  
7 Digital3  
7 Digital2  
Lock System  
: On  
Block Programme  
Parental Guidance: Blocking Off  
Input Block  
Key Lock  
: Off  
P
Pr. Change  
Page Change  
Block/Unblock  
Navigation  
Previous  
or  
Page 1/1  
C
Favourite Group :  
Programme Edit  
Cable DTV  
Cable Radio  
Cable TV  
2
5
8
Nine Digital HD  
7 HD Digital  
3
6
9
Nine Guide  
7 Digital 1  
7 Guide  
1
4
7
Nine Digital  
7 Digital  
7 Digital3  
7 Digital2  
P
Pr. Change  
Page Change  
Block/Unblock  
Navigation  
Previous  
1
2
3
4
5
Select LOCK.  
Select Lock System.  
Enter the Block Progra mme.  
Enter the Block Programme.  
Select a programme to be locked.  
YELLOW  
Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.  
Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.  
126  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
PARENTAL CONTROL (IN DIGITAL MODE ONLY)  
This function operates according to information from the broadcasting station. Therefore if the signal  
has incorrect information, this function does not operate.  
A password is required to gain access to this menu.  
This set is programmed to remember which option it was last set to even if you switch the set off.  
Prevents children from watching certain adult’s TV programmes, according to the ratings limit set.  
Enter a password to watch a blocked programme.  
Rating differs by country.  
LOCK  
LOCK  
Move  
OK  
Blocking Off : Permits all  
Programmes for 18 and above will  
Set Password  
Set Password  
programmes  
be blocked  
Lock System  
: On  
Block Programme  
Lock System  
: On  
Block Program
12 and above  
12 and above  
13 and above  
14 and above  
15 and above  
16 and above  
17 and above  
13 and above  
Parental Guida
Parental Guidance: Blocking Off  
14 and above  
Input Block  
Input Block  
15 and above  
Key Lock  
: Off  
Key Lock  
: Off  
16 and above  
17 and above  
18 and above  
18 and above  
Blocking Off  
(Except for France)  
(Only France)  
1
2
3
4
Select LOCK.  
Select Lock System.  
Select Parental Guidance.  
Make appropriate adjustments.  
Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.  
Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.  
127  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
PARENTAL CONTROL / RATINGS  
EXTERNAL INPUT BLOCKING  
Enables you to block an input.  
It is available to use this function in Lock System On.  
Image shown may differ from your TV.  
LOCK  
LOCK  
Move  
OK  
AV1
AV2  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Set Password  
Set Password  
Lock System  
Lock System  
: On  
: On  
AV3  
Block Programme  
Block Progra
Component  
Parental Guid
Parental Guidance: Blocking Off  
Input Block  
RGB  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Input Block  
HDMI1  
HDMI2  
HDMI3  
HDMI4  
Key Lock  
: Off  
Key Lock  
: Off  
Close  
1
2
3
4
Select LOCK.  
Select Lock System.  
Select Input Block.  
Select input source.  
5
Select On or Off.  
Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.  
Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.  
128  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
KEY LOCK  
This feature can be used to prevent unauthorized viewing by locking out the front panel controls, so  
that it can only be used with the remote control.  
This TV is programmed to remember which option it was last set to even if you turn the TV off.  
LOCK  
LOCK  
Move  
OK  
Move  
OK  
Set Password  
Lock System  
Set Password  
Lock System  
: Off  
: Off  
Block Programme  
Block Programme  
Parental Guidance: Blocking Off  
Input Block  
Parental Guidance: Blocking Off  
Input Block  
Off  
Key Lock  
: Off  
Key Lock  
: Off  
On  
1
2
3
In Key Lock On’, if the TV is turned off, press the  
/ I, INPUT, P or P ) button on the TV or  
POWER, INPUT, P  
remote control then the set will be turned on.  
With the Key Lock On, the display ‘ Key  
Select LOCK.  
(
▲▼  
or NUMBER buttons on the  
Select Key Lock.  
Select On or Off.  
Lock On ’ appears on the screen if any button on  
the front panel is pressed while viewing the TV.  
• When another OSD is displayed,  
will not operate.  
‘ Key Lock On ’  
Press the MENU/EXIT button to return to normal TV viewing.  
Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.  
129  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TELETEXT  
This feature is not available in all countries.  
Image shown  
may differ from  
your TV.  
Teletext is a free service broadcast by most TV stations which gives up-to-the-  
minute information on news, weather, television programmes, share prices and  
many other topics.  
The teletext decoder of this TV can support the SIMPLE, TOP and FASTEXT  
systems. SIMPLE (standard teletext) consists of a number of pages which are  
selected by directly entering the corresponding page number. TOP and  
FASTEXT are more modern methods allowing quick and easy selection of  
teletext information.  
SWITCH ON/OFF  
Press the TEXT button to switch to teletext. The initial page or last page  
viewed appears on the screen.  
Two page numbers, TV station name, date and time are displayed on the  
screen headline. The first page number indicates your selection, while the sec-  
ond shows the current page displayed.  
Press the TEXT button to switch off teletext. The previous mode reappears.  
SIMPLE TEXT  
Page selection  
Enter the desired page number as a three digit number with the NUMBER buttons. If during selec-  
tion you press a wrong number, you must complete the three digit number and then re-enter the  
correct page number.  
1
2 The P  
button can be used to select the preceding or following page.  
130  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TOP TEXT  
The user guide displays four fields-red, green, yellow and blue at the bottom of the screen. The yellow  
field denotes the next group and the blue field indicates the next block.  
Block / group / page selection  
1
With the blue button you can progress from block to block.  
2
Use the yellow button to proceed to the next group with automatic overflow to the next block.  
3
With the green button you can proceed to the next existing page with automatic overflow to the next  
group.  
Alternatively the P button can be used.  
4
The red button returns to the previous selection. Alternatively the P button can be used.  
Direct page selection  
As with SIMPLE teletext mode, you can select a page by entering it as a three digit number using  
the NUMBER buttons in TOP mode.  
FASTEXT  
The teletext pages are colour coded along the bottom of the screen and are selected by pressing the  
corresponding coloured button.  
Page selection  
1
Press the T.OPT button and then use  
button to select  
menu. Display the index page.  
2
3
4
You can select the pages which are colour coded along the bottom line with corresponding  
coloured buttons.  
AS with SIMPLE teletext mode, you can select a page by entering its three digit page number with  
the NUMBER buttons in FASTEXT mode.  
The P  
button can be used to select the preceding or following page.  
131  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TELETEXT  
SPECIAL TELETEXT FUNCTIONS  
Press the T. OPT button and then use  
button to select the Text Option menu.  
In UK(In digital mode), T. OPT button does not work.  
Text Option  
Index  
Select the each index page.  
Index  
Time  
Hold  
Reveal  
Update  
Time  
When viewing a TV programme, select this menu to display the time at the top right  
hand corner of the screen.  
Close  
In the teletext mode, press this button to select a sub page number. The sub page number is displayed at  
< >  
the bottom of the screen. To hold or change the sub page, press the RED/GREEN, or NUMBER buttons.  
Hold  
Stops the automatic page change which will occur if a teletext page consists of 2 or more sub pages.  
The number of sub pages and the sub page displayed is, usually, shown on the screen below the  
time. When this menu is selected the stop symbol is displayed at the top left-hand corner of the  
screen and the automatic page change is inactive.  
Reveal  
Select this menu to display concealed information, such as solutions to riddles or puzzles.  
Update  
Displays the TV picture on the screen while waiting for a new teletext page. The display will appear at  
the top left hand corner of the screen. When the updated page is available then display will change to  
the page number. Select this menu again to view the updated teletext page.  
132  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
DIGITAL TELETEXT  
*This function works in UK, Ireland only.  
The TV gives you access to digital teletext which is greatly improved in various aspects such as text,  
graphics etc.  
This digital teletext can access special digital teletext services and specific services which broadcast  
digital teletext.  
TELETEXT WITHIN DIGITAL SERVICE  
Press the numeric or P  
digital service which broadcasts digital teletext.  
button to select a  
1
Follow the indications on digital teletext and  
move onto the next step by pressing TEXT,  
2
OK,  
, RED, GREEN, YELLOW, BLUE  
or NUMBER buttons and etc..  
To change digital teletext service, select a dif-  
3
ferent service by the numeric or P  
button.  
TELETEXT IN DIGITAL SERVICE  
1
Press the numeric or P  
certain service which broadcasts digital teletext.  
button to select a  
Press the TEXT or coloured button to switch on  
teletext.  
2
3
Follow the indications on digital teletext and move  
onto the next step by pressing OK,  
, RED,  
GREEN, YELLOW, BLUE or NUMBER buttons and  
so on.  
Press the TEXT or colour button to switch off  
digital teletext and return to TV viewing.  
4
Some services may allow you to access text ser-  
vices by pressing the RED button.  
133  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
APPENDIX  
TROUBLESHOOTING  
The TV does not operate properly.  
Check to see if there is any object between the TV and the remote con-  
trol causing an obstruction. Ensure you are pointing the remote control  
directly at the TV.  
The remote control  
does not work  
Ensure that the batteries are installed with correct polarity (+ to +, - to -).  
Install new batteries.  
Is the sleep timer set?  
Check the power control settings. Has the Power supply been interrupted.  
Power is suddenly  
turned off  
If the TV is switched on and there is no input signal, it will switch off auto-  
matically after 15 minutes.(Except for 19/22/26/32LD350C-ZA,  
32/37/42/47LD420C-ZA, 32/37/42/47/55LE531C-ZA)  
The video function does not work.  
Check whether the TV is switched on.  
Try another channel. The problem may be with the broadcast.  
No picture & No sound Is the power cord inserted correctly into the mains?  
Check your antenna direction and/or location.  
Test the mains outlet by plugging another TV into the same outlet.  
Picture appears slowly  
after switching on  
This is normal, the image is muted during the TV startup process. Please contact  
your service centre, if the picture has not appeared after five minutes.  
Adjust Colour in menu option.  
Allow a sufficient distance between the TV and the VCR.  
Try another channel. The problem may be with the broadcast.  
Are the video cables installed properly?  
No or poor colour  
or poor picture  
Activate any function to restore the brightness of the picture.  
Horizontal/vertical bars  
or picture shaking  
Check for local interference such as an electrical appliance or power tool.  
Station or cable channel experiencing problems, tune to another station.  
Station signal is weak, reposition the antenna to receive weaker stations.  
Check for sources of possible interference.  
Poor reception on  
some channels  
Lines or streaks  
in pictures  
Check antenna (Change the position of the antenna).  
No picture  
Check that your HDMI cable is High Speed HDMI Cable. If the HDMI cables are  
not High Speed HDMI Cable, flickering or no screen display can result. Please  
use the High Speed HDMI Cable.  
when connecting  
HDMI  
134  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The audio function does not work.  
Press the  
+ or - button.  
Picture OK & No  
sound  
Sound muted? Press MUTE button.  
Try another channel. The problem may be with the broadcast.  
Are the audio cables installed properly?  
No output from one  
of the speakers  
Adjust Balance in menu option.  
Unusual sound from A change in ambient humidity or temperature may result in an unusual noise  
inside the TV  
when the TV is switched on or off and does not indicate a fault with the TV.  
Check HDMI cable is High Speed HDMI Cable.  
No sound when con-  
necting HDMI or USB  
Check USB cable over version 2.0.  
*This feature is not available for all models.  
There is a problem in PC mode. (Only PC mode applied)  
The signal is out of  
Adjust resolution, horizontal frequency, or vertical frequency.  
range  
Check the input source.  
(Invalid format)  
Vertical bar or stripe on  
background &  
Horizontal Noise &  
Incorrect position  
Use Auto configure or adjust clock, phase, or H/V position. (Option)  
Screen colour is  
unstable or single  
colour  
Check the signal cable.  
Reinstall the PC video card.  
There is a problem with PICTURE settings.  
When the user chang-  
es the picture settings, It means that the TV is currently set to Store Demo mode.  
the TV automatically  
converts back to the  
initial settings after a  
certain period of time.  
To switch to Home use mode you should do the followings:  
From the TV Menu, choose OPTION -> Choose Mode Setting -> Choose  
Home use. Now, you have completed switching to the Home use mode.  
135  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
APPENDIX  
MAINTENANCE  
Early malfunctions can be prevented. Careful and regular cleaning can prolong the life of your new TV.  
Caution: Be sure to switch the power off and unplug the power cord before you begin any cleaning.  
Cleaning the Screen  
A good way to keep the dust off your screen for a while is to wet a soft cloth in a mixture of luke-  
warm water and a little fabric softener or dish washing detergent. Wring the cloth until it is  
almost dry, and then use it to wipe the screen.  
1
Ensure there is no excess water on the screen. Allow any water or dampness to evaporate  
before switching on.  
2
Cleaning the Cabinet  
To remove dirt or dust, wipe the cabinet with a soft, dry, lint-free cloth.  
Do not to use a wet cloth.  
Extended Absence  
CAUTION  
If you expect to leave your TV dormant for prolonged periods (such as a holiday), unplug the power cord to  
protect against possible damage from lightning or power surges.  
136  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS  
19LD35 / 19LD34  
** **  
22LD35 / 22LD34  
** **  
19LD350-ZA / 19LD350N-ZA  
19LD358-ZA / 19LD359-ZB  
19LD350C-ZA / 19LD351-ZB  
19LD351N-ZB  
19LD340-ZA / 19LD341-ZB  
19LD340N-ZA / 19LD341N-ZB  
19LD348-ZA / 19LD355-ZA  
19LD356-ZB / 19LD345-ZA  
19LD346-ZB  
22LD350-ZA / 22LD350N-ZA  
22LD358-ZA / 22LD359-ZB  
22LD350C-ZA / 22LD351-ZB  
22LD351N-ZB  
22LD340-ZA / 22LD341-ZB  
22LD340N-ZA / 22LD341N-ZB  
22LD348-ZA / 22LD355-ZA  
22LD356-ZB / 22LD345-ZA  
22LD346-ZB  
MODELS  
Dimensions  
(Width x Height x  
Depth)  
457.0 mm x 336.0 mm x 164.9 mm  
457.0 mm x 290.0 mm x 65.0 mm  
526.0 mm x 377.0 mm x 164.9 mm  
526.0 mm x 331.0 mm x 65.0 mm  
with stand  
without stand  
with stand  
3.4 kg  
3.1 kg  
4.3 kg  
4.0 kg  
Weight  
without stand  
Power requirement  
Power Consumption  
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz  
30 W  
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz  
50 W  
26LD35 / 26LD34  
** **  
32LD35 / 32LD34  
** **  
26LD350-ZA / 26LD350N-ZA  
26LD358-ZA / 26LD359-ZB  
26LD350C-ZA /26LD351-ZB  
26LD351N-ZB  
26LD340-ZA / 26LD341-ZB  
26LD340N-ZA / 26LD341N-ZB  
26LD348-ZA / 26LD355-ZA  
26LD356-ZB / 26LD345-ZA  
26LD346-ZB  
32LD350-ZA / 32LD350N-ZA  
32LD358-ZA / 32LD359-ZB  
32LD350C-ZA  
32LD351-ZB / 32LD351N-ZB  
32LD340-ZA / 32LD341-ZB  
32LD340N-ZA / 32LD341N-ZB  
32LD348-ZA / 32LD355-ZA  
32LD356-ZB / 32LD345-ZA  
32LD346-ZB  
MODELS  
Dimensions  
(Width x Height x  
Depth)  
663.0 mm x 484.0 mm x 206.8 mm  
663.0 mm x 423.0 mm x 79.9 mm  
800.0 mm x 565.0 mm x 206.8 mm  
800.0 mm x 509.0 mm x 73.8 mm  
with stand  
without stand  
with stand  
7.3 kg  
6.2 kg  
9.2 kg  
8.2 kg  
Weight  
without stand  
Power requirement  
Power Consumption  
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz  
100 W  
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz  
120 W  
CI Module Size  
(Width x Height x Depth)  
100.0 mm x 55.0 mm x 5.0 mm  
Operating  
0 °C  
40 °C  
to  
Temperature  
Less than 80 %  
Operating Humidity  
Environment condition  
Storage Temperature  
Storage Humidity  
-20 °C 60 °C  
to  
Less than 85 %  
The specifications shown above may be changed without prior notice for quality improvement.  
137  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
APPENDIX  
32LD4  
***  
32LD450-ZA / 32LD450N-ZA  
32LD458-ZA / 32LD450C-ZA  
32LD465-ZA / 32LD465N-ZA  
32LD468-ZA / 32LD455-ZA  
MODELS  
32LD420-ZA / 32LD420N-ZA  
32LD428-ZA / 32LD420C-ZA  
32LD425-ZA  
32LD421-ZB / 32LD421N-ZB  
32LD426-ZB  
Dimensions  
(Width x Height x  
Depth)  
805.0 mm x 583.0 mm x 224.0 mm  
805.0 mm x 531.0 mm x 79.9 mm  
805.0 mm x 586.0 mm x 211.0 mm  
805.0 mm x 531.0 mm x 79.9 mm  
799.0 mm x 555.0 mm x 207.0 mm  
799.0 mm x 506.0 mm x 73.5 mm  
with stand  
without stand  
with stand  
10.8 kg  
9.7 kg  
10.8 kg  
9.7 kg  
9.1 kg  
8.1 kg  
Weight  
without stand  
Power requirement  
Power Consumption  
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz  
140 W  
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz  
140 W  
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz  
120 W  
37LD4  
***  
37LD450-ZA / 37LD450N-ZA  
37LD458-ZA / 37LD450C-ZA  
37LD465-ZA 37LD465N-ZA  
37LD468-ZA / 37LD455-ZA  
MODELS  
37LD420-ZA / 37LD420N-ZA  
37LD428-ZA / 37LD420C-ZA  
37LD425-ZA  
37LD421-ZB / 37LD421N-ZB  
37LD426-ZB  
Dimensions  
(Width x Height x  
Depth)  
922.0 mm x 659.0 mm x 297.0 mm  
922.0 mm x 595.0 mm x 88.0 mm  
922.0 mm x 660.0 mm x 270.6 mm  
922.0 mm x 595.0 mm x 88.0 mm  
916.0 mm x 625.0 mm x 261.0 mm  
916.0 mm x 575.0 mm x 77.4 mm  
with stand  
without stand  
with stand  
14.0 kg  
12.2 kg  
14.0 kg  
12.2 kg  
12.5 kg  
10.8 kg  
Weight  
without stand  
Power requirement  
Power Consumption  
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz  
150 W  
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz  
150 W  
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz  
160 W  
CI Module Size  
(Width x Height x Depth)  
100.0 mm x 55.0 mm x 5.0 mm  
Operating  
0 °C  
40 °C  
to  
Temperature  
Less than 80 %  
Operating Humidity  
Storage Temperature  
Storage Humidity  
Environment condition  
-20 °C 60 °C  
to  
Less than 85 %  
The specifications shown above may be changed without prior notice for quality improvement.  
138  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
42LD4  
***  
42LD450-ZA / 42LD450N-ZA  
42LD458-ZA / 42LD450C-ZA  
42LD465-ZA / 42LD465N-ZA  
42LD468-ZA / 42LD455-ZA  
MODELS  
42LD420-ZA / 42LD420N-ZA  
42LD428-ZA / 42LD420C-ZA  
42LD425-ZA  
42LD421-ZB / 42LD421N-ZB  
42LD426-ZB  
Dimensions  
(Width x Height x  
Depth)  
1028.0 mm x 715.4 mm x 297.0 mm  
1028.0 mm x 658.6 mm x 88.7 mm  
1028.0 mm x 716.4 mm x 270.6 mm  
1028.0 mm x 658.6 mm x 88.7 mm  
1023.0 mm x 685.0 mm x 261.0 mm  
1023.0 mm x 635.0 mm x 76.6 mm  
with stand  
without stand  
with stand  
17.3 kg  
15.5 kg  
17.3 kg  
15.5 kg  
15.1 kg  
13.5 kg  
Weight  
without stand  
Power requirement  
Power Consumption  
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz  
190 W  
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz  
190 W  
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz  
190 W  
47LD4  
***  
47LD450-ZA / 47LD450N-ZA  
47LD458-ZA / 47LD450C-ZA  
47LD465-ZA / 47LD465N-ZA  
47LD468-ZA / 47LD455-ZA  
MODELS  
47LD420-ZA / 47LD420N-ZA  
47LD428-ZA / 47LD420C-ZA  
47LD425-ZA  
47LD421-ZB / 47LD421N-ZB  
47LD426-ZB  
Dimensions  
(Width x Height x  
Depth)  
1140.6 mm x 784.8 mm x 337.4 mm  
1140.6 mm x 722.9 mm x 99.0 mm  
1140.6 mm x 788.3 mm x 318.9 mm  
1140.6 mm x 722.9 mm x 99.0 mm  
1136.0 mm x 757.0 mm x 270.0 mm  
1136.0 mm x 698.0 mm x 76.5 mm  
with stand  
without stand  
with stand  
21.6 kg  
19.0 kg  
21.6 kg  
19.0 kg  
19.5 kg  
17.5 kg  
Weight  
without stand  
Power requirement  
Power Consumption  
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz  
260 W  
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz  
260 W  
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz  
260 W  
CI Module Size  
(Width x Height x Depth)  
100.0 mm x 55.0 mm x 5.0 mm  
Operating  
0 °C  
40 °C  
to  
Temperature  
Less than 80 %  
Operating Humidity  
Storage Temperature  
Storage Humidity  
Environment condition  
-20 °C 60 °C  
to  
Less than 85 %  
The specifications shown above may be changed without prior notice for quality improvement.  
139  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
APPENDIX  
32LD5  
***  
MODELS  
32LD550-ZC / 32LD550N-ZC  
32LD558-ZC / 32LD559-ZA  
32LD565-ZC / 32LD565N-ZC  
32LD551-ZA / 32LD551N-ZA  
32LD566-ZA / 32LD568-ZC  
32LD569-ZA / 32LD555-ZC  
Dimensions  
(Width x Height x  
Depth)  
800.0 mm x 563.0 mm x 207.0 mm  
800.0 mm x 503.0 mm x 74.7 mm  
800.0 mm x 563.0 mm x 207.0 mm  
800.0 mm x 503.0 mm x 74.7 mm  
with stand  
without stand  
with stand  
9.7 kg  
8.7 kg  
9.7 kg  
8.7 kg  
Weight  
without stand  
Power requirement  
Power Consumption  
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz  
150 W  
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz  
150 W  
42LD5  
***  
MODELS  
42LD550-ZC / 42LD550N-ZC  
42LD558-ZC / 42LD559-ZA  
42LD565-ZC / 42LD565N-ZC  
42LD551-ZA / 42LD551N-ZA  
42LD566-ZA / 42LD568-ZC  
42LD569-ZA / 42LD555-ZC  
Dimensions  
(Width x Height x  
Depth)  
1024.0 mm x 695.0 mm x 261.0 mm  
1024.0 mm x 632.0 mm x 78.7 mm  
1024.0 mm x 695.0 mm x 261.0 mm  
1024.0 mm x 632.0 mm x 78.7 mm  
with stand  
without stand  
with stand  
15.4 kg  
13.8 kg  
15.4 kg  
13.8 kg  
Weight  
without stand  
Power requirement  
Power Consumption  
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz  
210 W  
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz  
210 W  
CI Module Size  
(Width x Height x Depth)  
100.0 mm x 55.0 mm x 5.0 mm  
Operating  
0 °C  
40 °C  
to  
Temperature  
Less than 80 %  
Operating Humidity  
Storage Temperature  
Storage Humidity  
Environment condition  
-20 °C 60 °C  
to  
Less than 85 %  
The specifications shown above may be changed without prior notice for quality improvement.  
140  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
46LD5  
***  
MODELS  
46LD550-ZC / 46LD550N-ZC  
46LD558-ZC / 46LD559-ZA  
46LD565-ZC /46LD565N-ZC  
46LD551-ZA / 46LD551N-ZA  
46LD566-ZA / 46LD568-ZC  
46LD569-ZA/ 46LD555-ZC  
Dimensions  
(Width x Height x  
Depth)  
1115.0 mm x 752.0 mm x 270.0 mm  
1115.0 mm x 680.0 mm x 77.0 mm  
1115.0 mm x 752.0 mm x 270.0 mm  
1115.0 mm x 680.0 mm x 77.0 mm  
with stand  
without stand  
with stand  
18.6 kg  
16.6 kg  
18.6 kg  
16.6 kg  
Weight  
without stand  
Power requirement  
Power Consumption  
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz  
240 W  
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz  
240 W  
52LD5  
***  
MODELS  
52LD550-ZC / 52LD550N-ZC  
52LD558-ZC / 52LD559-ZA  
52LD565-ZC / 52LD565N-ZC  
52LD551-ZA / 52LD551N-ZA  
52LD566-ZA / 52LD568-ZC  
52LD569-ZA/ 52LD555-ZC  
Dimensions  
(Width x Height x  
Depth)  
1266.0 mm x 851.0 mm x 330.0 mm  
1266.0 mm x 775.0 mm x 96.4 mm  
1266.0 mm x 851.0 mm x 330.0 mm  
1266.0 mm x 775.0 mm x 96.4 mm  
with stand  
without stand  
with stand  
26.9 kg  
23.6 kg  
26.9 kg  
23.6 kg  
Weight  
without stand  
Power requirement  
Power Consumption  
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz  
300 W  
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz  
300 W  
CI Module Size  
(Width x Height x Depth)  
100.0 mm x 55.0 mm x 5.0 mm  
Operating  
0 °C  
40 °C  
to  
Temperature  
Less than 80 %  
Operating Humidity  
Storage Temperature  
Storage Humidity  
Environment condition  
-20 °C 60 °C  
to  
Less than 85 %  
The specifications shown above may be changed without prior notice for quality improvement.  
141  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
APPENDIX  
60LD5  
***  
MODELS  
60LD550-ZC / 60LD550N-ZC  
60LD558-ZC / 60LD559-ZA  
60LD565-ZC / 60LD565N-ZC  
60LD551-ZA / 60LD551N-ZA  
60LD566-ZA / 60LD568-ZC  
60LD569-ZA / 60LD555-ZC  
Dimensions  
(Width x Height x  
Depth)  
1441.0 mm x 963.0 mm x 345.0 mm  
1441.0 mm x 877.0 mm x 109.0 mm  
1441.0 mm x 963.0 mm x 345.0 mm  
1441.0 mm x 877.0 mm x 109.0 mm  
with stand  
without stand  
with stand  
40.0 kg  
35.7 kg  
40.0 kg  
35.7 kg  
Weight  
without stand  
Power requirement  
Power Consumption  
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz  
380 W  
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz  
380 W  
26LD32 / 26LD33  
** **  
32LD32 / 32LD33  
** **  
MODELS  
26LD325-ZA / 26LD325N-ZA  
26LD328-ZA  
26LD335-ZA / 26LD336-ZB  
32LD325-ZA / 32LD325N-ZA  
32LD328-ZA  
32LD335-ZA / 32LD336-ZB  
Dimensions  
(Width x Height x  
Depth)  
667.0 mm x 504.0 mm x 224.0 mm  
667.0 mm x 446.2 mm x 80.0 mm  
805.0 mm x 583.0 mm x 224.0 mm  
805.0 mm x 528.0 mm x 79.9 mm  
with stand  
without stand  
with stand  
8.9 kg  
7.8 kg  
11.5 kg  
10.3 kg  
Weight  
without stand  
Power requirement  
Power Consumption  
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz  
100 W  
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz  
120 W  
CI Module Size  
(Width x Height x Depth)  
100.0 mm x 55.0 mm x 5.0 mm  
Operating  
0 °C  
40 °C  
to  
Temperature  
Less than 80 %  
Operating Humidity  
Storage Temperature  
Storage Humidity  
Environment condition  
-20 °C 60 °C  
to  
Less than 85 %  
The specifications shown above may be changed without prior notice for quality improvement.  
142  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
32LE4  
***  
37LE4  
***  
MODELS  
32LE4500-ZA / 32LE450N-ZA  
32LE4508-ZA  
37LE4500-ZA / 37LE450N-ZA  
37LE4508-ZA  
Dimensions  
(Width x Height x  
Depth)  
786.0 mm x 559.0 mm x 221.0 mm  
786.0 mm x 500.0 mm x 39.9 mm  
907.0 mm x 630.0 mm x 270.0 mm  
907.0 mm x 565.0 mm x 39.9 mm  
with stand  
without stand  
with stand  
12.4 kg  
10.6 kg  
14.6 kg  
12.1 kg  
Weight  
without stand  
Power requirement  
Power Consumption  
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz  
130 W  
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz  
140 W  
42LE4  
***  
MODELS  
42LE4500-ZA / 42LE4500N-ZA  
42LE4508-ZA  
Dimensions  
(Width x Height x  
Depth)  
1018.0 mm x 692.0 mm x 270.0 mm  
1018.0 mm x 627.0 mm x 29.8 mm  
with stand  
without stand  
with stand  
19.7 kg  
17.2 kg  
Weight  
without stand  
Power requirement  
Power Consumption  
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz  
150 W  
CI Module Size  
(Width x Height x Depth)  
100.0 mm x 55.0 mm x 5.0 mm  
Operating  
0 °C  
40 °C  
to  
Temperature  
Less than 80 %  
Operating Humidity  
Storage Temperature  
Storage Humidity  
Environment condition  
-20 °C 60 °C  
to  
Less than 85 %  
Supported movie files  
Refer to p. 54 55  
to  
The specifications shown above may be changed without prior notice for quality improvement.  
143  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
APPENDIX  
19LE3  
***  
MODELS  
19LE3300-ZA / 19LE330N-ZA  
19LE3308-ZA / 19LE3400-ZA  
19LE340N-ZA / 19LE3408-ZA  
19LE3310-ZB / 19LE331N-ZB  
19LE3410-ZB / 19LE341N-ZB  
Dimensions  
(Width x Height x  
Depth)  
471.2 mm x 365.9 mm x 155.4 mm  
471.2 mm x 315.5 mm x 34.4 mm  
471.2 mm x 365.9 mm x 155.4 mm  
471.2 mm x 315.5 mm x 34.4 mm  
with stand  
without stand  
with stand  
3.4 kg  
3.2 kg  
3.4 kg  
3.2 kg  
Weight  
without stand  
19LE3 : DC 24 V, 1.6 A, 38 W  
***  
Power requirement  
AC-DC adaptor : 24 V  
, 3.42 A / AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz  
22LE3  
***  
MODELS  
22LE3300-ZA / 22LE330N-ZA  
22LE3308-ZA / 22LE3400-ZA  
22LE340N-ZA / 22LE3408-ZA  
22LE3310-ZB / 22LE331N-ZB  
22LE3410-ZB / 22LE341N-ZB  
Dimensions  
(Width x Height x  
Depth)  
542.9 mm x 407.1 mm x 155.4 mm  
542.9 mm x 357.6 mm x 34.4 mm  
542.9 mm x 407.1 mm x 155.4 mm  
542.9 mm x 357.6 mm x 34.4 mm  
with stand  
without stand  
with stand  
4.2 kg  
3.9 kg  
4.2 kg  
3.9 kg  
Weight  
without stand  
22LE3 : DC 24 V, 1.7 A, 40 W  
***  
Power requirement  
AC-DC adaptor : 24 V  
, 3.42 A / AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz  
22LE5  
***  
MODELS  
22LE5500-ZA / 22LE550N-ZA  
22LE5508-ZA  
22LE5510-ZB / 22LE551N-ZB  
22LE5518-ZB  
Dimensions  
(Width x Height x  
Depth)  
542.9 mm x 407.1 mm x 155.4 mm  
542.9 mm x 357.6 mm x 34.4 mm  
542.9 mm x 407.1 mm x 155.4 mm  
542.9 mm x 357.6 mm x 34.4 mm  
with stand  
without stand  
with stand  
4.2 kg  
3.9 kg  
4.2 kg  
3.9 kg  
Weight  
without stand  
22LE5 : DC 24 V, 1.7 A, 40 W  
***  
Power requirement  
AC-DC adaptor : 24 V  
, 3.42 A / AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz  
CI Module Size  
(Width x Height x Depth)  
100.0 mm x 55.0 mm x 5.0 mm  
Operating  
0 °C  
40 °C  
to  
Temperature  
Less than 80 %  
Operating Humidity  
Storage Temperature  
Storage Humidity  
Environment condition  
-20 °C 60 °C  
to  
Less than 85 %  
Supported movie files  
Refer to p. 54 55  
to  
The specifications shown above may be changed without prior notice for quality improvement.  
144  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
26LE3  
***  
MODELS  
26LE3300-ZA / 26LE330N-ZA  
26LE3308-ZA  
26LE3310-ZB / 26LE331N-ZB  
Dimensions  
(Width x Height x  
Depth)  
652.0 mm x 480.8 mm x 191.4 mm  
652.0 mm x 420.3 mm x 34.4 mm  
652.0 mm x 480.8 mm x 191.4 mm  
652.0 mm x 420.3 mm x 34.4 mm  
with stand  
without stand  
with stand  
6.1 kg  
5.1 kg  
6.1 kg  
5.1 kg  
Weight  
without stand  
26LE3 : DC 24 V, 1.8 A, 48 W  
***  
Power requirement  
AC-DC adaptor : 24 V  
, 3.42 A / AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz  
26LE5  
***  
MODELS  
26LE5500-ZA / 26LE550N-ZA  
26LE5508-ZA  
26LE5510-ZB / 26LE551N-ZB  
26LE5518-ZB  
Dimensions  
(Width x Height x  
Depth)  
652.0 mm x 480.8 mm x 191.4 mm  
652.0 mm x 420.3 mm x 34.4 mm  
652.0 mm x 480.8 mm x 191.4 mm  
652.0 mm x 420.3 mm x 34.4 mm  
with stand  
without stand  
with stand  
6.1 kg  
5.1 kg  
6.1 kg  
5.1 kg  
Weight  
without stand  
26LE5 : DC 24 V, 2.1 A, 55 W  
***  
Power requirement  
AC-DC adaptor : 24 V  
, 3.42 A / AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz  
32LE3  
***  
32LE5  
***  
32LE5300-ZA / 32LE530N-ZA  
32LE5308-ZA  
32LE5310-ZB / 32LE531N-ZB  
32LE5318-ZB / 32LE530C-ZA  
32LE531C-ZA  
MODELS  
32LE3300-ZA / 32LE330N-ZA  
32LE3308-ZA  
Dimensions  
(Width x Height x  
Depth)  
771.8 mm x 552.3 mm x 221.0 mm  
771.8 mm x 489.3 mm x 39.9 mm  
784.6 mm x 558.1 mm x 221.0 mm  
784.6 mm x 499.5 mm x 39.9 mm  
with stand  
without stand  
with stand  
11.8 kg  
10.0 kg  
12.65 kg  
10.5 kg  
Weight  
without stand  
Power requirement  
Power Consumption  
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz  
90 W  
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz  
130 W  
CI Module Size  
(Width x Height x Depth)  
100.0 mm x 55.0 mm x 5.0 mm  
Operating  
0 °C  
40 °C  
to  
Temperature  
Less than 80 %  
Operating Humidity  
Storage Temperature  
Storage Humidity  
Environment condition  
-20 °C 60 °C  
to  
Less than 85 %  
Supported movie files  
Refer to p. 54 55  
to  
The specifications shown above may be changed without prior notice for quality improvement.  
145  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
APPENDIX  
37LE5  
***  
MODELS  
37LE5300-ZA / 37LE530N-ZA  
37LE5308-ZA / 37LE530C-ZA  
37LE5310-ZB / 37LE531N-ZB  
37LE5318-ZB / 37LE531C-ZA  
Dimensions  
(Width x Height x  
Depth)  
905.0 mm x 630.0 mm x 270.0 mm  
905.0 mm x 568.0 mm x 39.9 mm  
905.0 mm x 630.0 mm x 270.0 mm  
905.0 mm x 568.0 mm x 39.9 mm  
with stand  
without stand  
with stand  
15.3 kg  
12.8 kg  
15.3 kg  
12.8 kg  
Weight  
without stand  
Power requirement  
Power Consumption  
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz  
140 W  
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz  
140 W  
42LE5  
***  
MODELS  
42LE5300-ZA / 42LE530N-ZA  
42LE5308-ZA / 42LE530C-ZA  
42LE5310-ZB / 42LE531N-ZB  
42LE5318-ZB / 42LE531C-ZA  
Dimensions  
(Width x Height x  
Depth)  
1016.0 mm x 692.0 mm x 270.0 mm  
1016.0 mm x 630.0 mm x 29.3 mm  
1016.0 mm x 692.0 mm x 270.0 mm  
1016.0 mm x 630.0 mm x 29.3 mm  
with stand  
without stand  
with stand  
19.2 kg  
16.7 kg  
19.2 kg  
16.7 kg  
Weight  
without stand  
Power requirement  
Power Consumption  
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz  
150 W  
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz  
150 W  
CI Module Size  
(Width x Height x Depth)  
100.0 mm x 55.0 mm x 5.0 mm  
Operating  
0 °C  
40 °C  
to  
Temperature  
Less than 80 %  
Operating Humidity  
Storage Temperature  
Storage Humidity  
Environment condition  
-20 °C 60 °C  
to  
Less than 85 %  
Supported movie files  
Refer to p. 54 55  
to  
The specifications shown above may be changed without prior notice for quality improvement.  
146  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
47LE5  
***  
MODELS  
47LE5300-ZA / 47LE530N-ZA  
47LE5308-ZA / 47LE530C-ZA  
47LE5310-ZB / 47LE531N-ZB  
47LE5318-ZB / 47LE531C-ZA  
Dimensions  
(Width x Height x  
Depth)  
1126.6 mm x 757.9 mm x 284.4 mm  
1126.6 mm x 692.0 mm x 29.3 mm  
1126.6 mm x 757.9 mm x 284.4 mm  
1126.6 mm x 692.0 mm x 29.3 mm  
with stand  
without stand  
with stand  
22.9 kg  
19.6 kg  
22.9 kg  
19.6 kg  
Weight  
without stand  
Power requirement  
Power Consumption  
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz  
170 W  
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz  
170 W  
55LE5  
***  
MODELS  
55LE5300-ZA / 55LE530N-ZA  
55LE5308-ZA / 55LE530C-ZA  
55LE5310-ZB / 55LE531N-ZB  
55LE5318-ZB / 55LE531C-ZA  
Dimensions  
(Width x Height x  
Depth)  
1306.0 mm x 867.0 mm x 328.0 mm  
1306.0 mm x 797.0 mm x 30.7 mm  
1306.0 mm x 867.0 mm x 328.0 mm  
1306.0 mm x 797.0 mm x 30.7 mm  
with stand  
without stand  
with stand  
34.05 kg  
29.35 kg  
34.05 kg  
29.35 kg  
Weight  
without stand  
Power requirement  
Power Consumption  
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz  
200 W  
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz  
200 W  
CI Module Size  
(Width x Height x Depth)  
100.0 mm x 55.0 mm x 5.0 mm  
Operating  
0 °C  
40 °C  
to  
Temperature  
Less than 80 %  
Operating Humidity  
Storage Temperature  
Storage Humidity  
Environment condition  
-20 °C 60 °C  
to  
Less than 85 %  
Supported movie files  
Refer to p. 54 55  
to  
The specifications shown above may be changed without prior notice for quality improvement.  
Digital TV  
DVB-T  
Analogue TV  
PAL/SECAM B/G/D/K, PAL I/II,  
SECAM L/L  
Television System  
DVB-C  
VHF: E2 to E12, UHF: E21 to E69,  
Programme Coverage  
VHF, UHF  
CATV: S1 to S20, HYPER: S21 to S47  
Maximum number of storable programmes  
External Antenna Impedance  
1,000  
75 Ω  
75 Ω  
The specifications shown above may be changed without prior notice for quality improvement.  
147  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
APPENDIX  
IR CODES  
*This feature is not available for all models.  
Code (Hexa)  
Function  
Energy Saving  
POWER  
INPUT  
Note  
R/C BUTTON  
95  
08  
0B  
79  
F0  
45  
43  
AB  
40  
R/C BUTTON(POWER ON/OFF)  
R/C BUTTON  
RATIO  
R/C BUTTON  
TV/RAD  
Q.MENU  
MENU  
R/C BUTTON  
R/C BUTTON  
R/C BUTTON  
GUIDE  
R/C BUTTON  
R/C BUTTON  
Up (  
)
41  
07  
06  
R/C BUTTON  
R/C BUTTON  
R/C BUTTON  
Down (  
Left (  
)
)
Right (  
)
44  
28  
5B  
AA  
30  
02  
03  
1E  
09  
00  
R/C BUTTON  
R/C BUTTON  
R/C BUTTON  
R/C BUTTON  
R/C BUTTON  
R/C BUTTON  
R/C BUTTON  
R/C BUTTON  
R/C BUTTON  
R/C BUTTON  
OK( )  
BACK  
EXIT  
INFO i  
AV MODE  
+
-
FAV ( MARK )  
MUTE  
P
01  
R/C BUTTON  
P
R/C BUTTON  
R/C BUTTON  
R/C BUTTON  
R/C BUTTON  
R/C BUTTON  
R/C BUTTON  
R/C BUTTON  
R/C BUTTON  
R/C BUTTON  
R/C BUTTON  
R/C BUTTON  
R/C BUTTON  
R/C BUTTON  
R/C BUTTON  
R/C BUTTON  
R/C BUTTON  
R/C BUTTON  
10 to 19  
53  
Number Key 0 to 9  
LIST  
1A  
72  
Q.VIEW  
RED Key  
GREEN Key  
YELLOW Key  
BLUE Key  
TEXT  
71  
63  
61  
20  
21  
T.OPT(T.Option)  
SUBTITLE  
SIMPLINK  
AD  
39  
7E  
91  
B1  
B0  
BA  
8F  
l l  
◄◄  
►►  
8E  
148  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
EXTERNAL CONTROL DEVICE SETUP  
RS-232C Setup  
Connect the RS-232C (serial port) input jack to an  
external control device (such as a computer or an  
A/V control system) to control the product’s func-  
tions externally.  
Connect the serial port of the control device to the  
RS-232C jack on the product back panel.  
Note: RS-232C connection cables are not supplied  
with the product.  
Type of Connector; D-Sub 9-Pin Male  
No. Pin Name  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
No connection  
1
6
5
9
(
)
)
RXD Receive data  
(
TXD Transmit data  
(
)
DTR DTE side ready  
GND  
(
)
DSR DCE side ready  
(
)
RTS Ready to send  
(
)
CTS Clear to send  
No Connection  
RS-232C Configurations  
(
)
3-Wire Configurations Not standard  
(
)
7-Wire Configurations Standard RS-232C cable  
PC  
TV  
PC  
TV  
RXD  
TXD  
GND  
DTR  
DSR  
RTS  
CTS  
2
3
5
4
6
7
8
3
2
5
6
4
8
7
TXD  
RXD  
GND  
DSR  
DTR  
CTS  
RTS  
RXD  
TXD  
GND  
DTR  
DSR  
RTS  
CTS  
2
3
5
4
6
7
8
3
2
5
6
4
7
8
TXD  
RXD  
GND  
DTR  
DSR  
RTS  
CTS  
D-Sub 9  
D-Sub 9  
D-Sub 9  
D-Sub 9  
149  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
APPENDIX  
Set ID  
Use this function to specify a set ID number.  
Refer to ‘Real Data Mapping’.  
p.154  
OPTION  
OPTION  
Move  
OK  
Move  
OK  
Language(Language)  
Language(Language)  
Country  
: UK  
Country  
: UK  
Disability Assistance  
Power Indicator  
Factory Reset  
Disability Assistance  
Power Indicator  
Factory Reset  
1
Set ID  
:1  
Set ID  
:1  
Mode Setting  
: Home Use  
Mode Setting  
: Ho
Close  
1
2
3
Select OPTION.  
Select Set ID.  
Adjust Set ID to choose the desired TV ID number.  
The adjustment range of SET ID is 1 to99.  
Press the BACK button to move to the previous menu screen.  
150  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Communication Parameters  
(
)
Baud rate : 9600 bps UART  
Use a crossed (reverse) cable.  
Data length : 8 bits  
Parity : None  
Stop bit : 1 bit  
Communication code : ASCII code  
Transmission / Receiving Protocol  
Transmission  
[Command1][Command2][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]  
Command Reference List  
[Command 1] : First command to control the TV.  
(j, k, m or x)  
*
COMMAND COMMAND  
DATA  
(Hexadecimal)  
1
2
[Command 2] : Second command to control the TV.  
*
*
[Set ID]  
: You can adjust the set ID to choose  
desired monitor ID number in option  
menu. Adjustment range is 1 to 99.  
When selecting Set ID ‘0’, every con-  
nected set is controlled.  
01. Power  
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
x
j
a
c
d
e
f
00 to 01  
Refer to p. 152  
Refer to p. 152  
00 to 01  
00 to 64  
00 to 64  
00 to 64  
00 to 64  
00 to 64  
00 to 64  
00 to 01  
00 to 01  
00 to 64  
00 to 64  
00 to 64  
00 to 64  
00 to 05  
01  
02. Aspect Ratio  
03. Screen Mute  
04. Volume Mute  
05. Volume Control  
06. Contrast  
Set ID is indicated as decimal (1 to 99)  
on menu and as Hexa decimal (0x0 to  
0x63) on transmission/receiving proto-  
col.  
g
h
i
07. Brightness  
[DATA]  
: To transmit command data.  
Transmit ‘FF’ data to read status of com-  
mand.  
08. Colour  
*
09. Tint  
j
10. Sharpness  
k
l
[Cr]  
[ ]  
: Carriage Return  
ASCII code ‘0x0D’  
: ASCII code ‘space (0x20)’  
*
*
11. OSD Select  
12. Remote control lock mode  
13. Treble  
m
r
OK Acknowledgement  
14. Bass  
s
t
15. Balance  
[Command2][ ][Set ID][ ][OK][Data][x]  
16. Colour Temperature  
17. Energy Saving  
18. Auto Configuration  
19. Tune Command  
20. Programme Add/Skip  
21. Key  
u
q
u
a
b
c
g
b
* The set transmits ACK (acknowledgement) based  
on this format when receiving normal data. At this  
time, if the data is data read mode, it indicates  
present status data. If the data is data write mode,  
it returns the data of the PC computer.  
j
m
m
m
m
x
Refer to p. 154  
00 to  
1
Key Code  
00 to 64  
Error Acknowledgement  
22. Control Back Light  
23. Input select (Main)  
[Command2][ ][Set ID][ ][NG][Data][x]  
Refer to p. 155  
* The set transmits ACK (acknowledgement) based  
on this format when receiving abnormal data from  
non-viable functions or communication errors.  
* Note : During USB operations such as DivX or EMF, all  
commands except Power(ka) and Key(mc) are not exe-  
cuted and treated as NG.  
Data 00: Illegal Code  
151  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
APPENDIX  
01. Power (Command: k a)  
04. Volume Mute (Command: k e)  
To control Power On/Off of the set.  
Transmission  
To control volume mute on/off.  
You can also adjust mute using the MUTE button on  
remote control.  
[k][a][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]  
Transmission  
Data 00 : Power Off  
01 : Power On  
[k][e][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]  
Ack  
Data 00 : Volume mute on (Volume off)  
01 : Volume mute off (Volume on)  
[a][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]  
Ack  
To show Power On/Off.  
Transmission  
[e][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]  
05. Volume Control (Command: k f)  
[k][a][ ][Set ID][ ][FF][Cr]  
Ack  
To adjust volume.  
You can also adjust volume with the VOLUME but-  
tons on remote control.  
[a][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]  
* Similarly, if other functions transmit ‘0xFF’ data  
based on this format, Acknowledgement data feed  
back presents status about each function.  
* OK Ack., Error Ack. and other message may dis-  
play on the screen when TV is power On.  
Transmission  
[k][f][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]  
Data Min : 00 to Max : 64  
Refer to ‘Real data mapping 1’. See page 154.  
*
Ack  
02. Aspect Ratio (Command: k c) (Main Picture Size)  
[f][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]  
To adjust the screen format. (Main picture format)  
You can also adjust the screen format using the  
Aspect Ratio in the Q.MENU. or PICTURE menu.  
06. Contrast (Command: k g)  
To adjust screen contrast.  
You can also adjust contrast in the PICTURE menu.  
Transmission  
Transmission  
[k][c][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]  
[k][g][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]  
Data Min : 00 to Max : 64  
Data 01 : Normal screen (4:3)  
02 : Wide screen (16:9)  
04 : Zoom  
07 : 14:9  
09 : Just Scan  
Refer to ‘Real data mapping 1’. See page 154.  
0B : Full Wide  
10 to 1F : Cinema Zoom 1 to 16  
*
06 : Original  
Ack  
Ack  
[g][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]  
[c][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]  
07. Brightness (Command: k h)  
* Using the PC input, you select either 16:9 or 4:3  
screen aspect ratio.  
To adjust screen brightness.  
You can also adjust brightness in the PICTURE menu.  
In DTV/HDMI (1080i 50 Hz / 60 Hz, 720p 50Hz /  
60 Hz, 1080p 24 Hz / 30 Hz / 50 Hz / 60 Hz),  
Component( 720p, 1080i, 1080p 50 Hz / 60 Hz)  
mode, Just Scan is available.  
*
Transmission  
[k][h][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]  
Data Min : 00 to Max : 64  
* Full Wide is supported only for Digital, Analogue  
AV.  
,
Refer to ‘Real data mapping 1’. See page 154.  
*
Ack  
03. Screen Mute (Command: k d)  
[h][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]  
To select screen mute on/off.  
Transmission  
08. Colour (Command: k i)  
To adjust the screen colour.  
You can also adjust colour in the PICTURE menu.  
[k][d][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]  
Data00 : Screen mute off (Picture on)  
Video mute off  
Transmission  
[k][i][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]  
Data Min : 00 to Max : 64  
01 : Screen mute on (Picture off)  
10 : Video mute on  
Refer to ‘Real data mapping 1’. See page 154.  
*
Ack  
Ack  
[d][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]  
[i][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]  
* In case of video mute on only, TV will display On  
Screen Display(OSD). But, in case of Screen mute  
152  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
09. Tint (Command: k j)  
13. Treble (Command: k r)  
To adjust the screen tint.  
To adjust treble.  
You can also adjust tint in the PICTURE menu.  
You can also adjust treble in the AUDIO menu.  
Transmission  
Transmission  
[k][j][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]  
Data Red : 00 to Green : 64  
[k][r][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]  
Data Min : 00 to Max : 64  
Refer to ‘Real data mapping 1’. See page 154.  
*
Refer to ‘Real data mapping 1’. See page 154.  
*
Ack  
Ack  
[j][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]  
[r][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]  
14. Bass (Command: k s)  
10. Sharpness (Command: k k)  
To adjust bass.  
You can also adjust bass in the AUDIO menu.  
To adjust the screen sharpness.  
You can also adjust sharpness in the PICTURE menu.  
Transmission  
Transmission  
[k][s][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]  
Data Min : 00 to Max : 64  
[k][k][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]  
Data Min : 00 to Max : 64  
Refer to ‘Real data mapping 1’. See page 154.  
*
Refer to ‘Real data mapping 1’. See page 154.  
*
Ack  
Ack  
[k][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]  
[s][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]  
15. Balance (Command: k t)  
To adjust balance.  
11. OSD Select (Command: k l)  
To select OSD (On Screen Display) on/off when con-  
trolling remotely.  
You can also adjust balance in the AUDIO menu.  
Transmission  
[k][t][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]  
Data Min : 00 to Max : 64  
Transmission  
Refer to ‘Real data mapping 1’. See page 154.  
*
[k][l][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]  
Ack  
Data 00 : OSD off  
01 : OSD on  
[t][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]  
Ack  
[l][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]  
16. Colour Temperature (Command: x u)  
To adjust colour temperature. You can also adjust Colour  
Temperature in the PICTURE menu.  
Transmission  
12. Remote control lock mode (Command: k m)  
To lock the front panel controls on the monitor and  
remote control.  
Transmission  
[x][u][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]  
Data Min : 00 to Max : 64  
[k][m][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]  
Refer to ‘Real data mapping 1’. See page 154.  
*
Data 00 : Lock off  
01 : Lock on  
Ack  
[u][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]  
Ack  
[m][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]  
* If you are not using the remote control, use this  
mode.  
When main power is on/off, external control lock is  
released.  
* In the standby mode, if key lock is on, TV will not  
turn on by power on key of IR & Local Key.  
153  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
APPENDIX  
17. Energy Saving (Command: j q)  
19.Tune Command (Command: m a)  
Select channel to following physical number.  
Transmission  
To reduce the power consumption of the TV. You can  
also adjust Energy Saving in PICTURE menu.  
Transmission  
[m][a][ ][Set ID][ ][Data0][ ][Data1][ ][Data2][Cr]  
[j][q][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]  
Data00 : High channel data  
Data01 : Low channel data  
ex. No. 47 -> 00 2F (2FH)  
No. 394 -> 01 8A (18AH),  
DTV No. 0 -> Don’t care  
Data02 : 0x00 : Analogue Main  
0x10 : DTV Main  
Power Saving  
Level  
Function  
Description  
7
0
0
0
0
0
0
6
0
0
0
0
0
0
5
0
0
0
0
0
0
4
0
0
0
0
0
0
3
0
0
0
0
0
0
2
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
Low Power  
Low Power  
Low Power  
Low Power  
Low Power  
Low Power  
Off  
0x20 : Radio  
Minimum  
Medium  
Maximum  
Auto  
Channel data range  
Analogue - Min: 00 to Max: 63 (0 to 99)  
Digital - Min: 00 to Max: 3E7 (0 to 999)  
(Except For Sweden, Finland, Norway, Denmark,  
Ireland)  
Digital - Min: 00 to Max: 270F (0 to 9999)  
(Only Sweden, Finland, Norway, Denmark, Ireland)  
Screen Off  
(Only 32/42/46/60LD5 , 32LE3  
,
Ack  
*** ***  
32/37/42LE4 , 32/37/42/47/55LE5  
)
*** ***  
[a][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]  
Data Min: 00 to Max: 7DH  
Ack  
[q][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]  
20. Programme Add/Skip(Command: m b)  
18. Auto Configure(Command: j u)  
To set skip status for the current Programme.  
Transmission  
To adjust picture position and minimize image shaking  
automatically. It works only in RGB (PC) mode.  
Transmission  
[m][b][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]  
Data 00 : Skip  
01 : Add  
[j][u][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]  
Data 01: To set  
Ack  
Ack  
[b][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]  
[u][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]  
Real data mapping 1  
*
00 : Step 0  
A : Step 10 (Set ID 10)  
F : Step 15 (Set ID 15)  
10 : Step 16 (Set ID 16)  
64 : Step 100  
6E : Step 110  
73 : Step 115  
74 : Step 116  
CF : Step 199  
FE : Step 254  
FF : Step 255  
154  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
21. Key(Command: m c)  
23. Input select (Command: x b)  
(Main Picture Input)  
To send IR remote key code.  
Transmission  
To select input source for main picture.  
Transmission  
[m][c][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]  
[x][b][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]  
Data Structure  
Data Key code - Refer to page 148.  
Ack  
[c][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]  
MSB  
0
LSB  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
External Input  
External Input  
Input Number  
Data  
22. Control Back Light (Command: m g)  
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
1
0
0
1
0
DTV  
1
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
Analogue  
AV  
To Control the back light.  
Transmission  
Component  
RGB  
[m][g][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]  
Data : data Min: 00 to Max: 64  
HDMI  
Ack  
[g][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]  
Input Number  
Data  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Input1  
Input2  
Input3  
Input4  
Ack  
[b][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]  
155  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
APPENDIX  
OPEN SOURCE SOFTWARE NOTICE  
The following GPL executables and LGPL, MPL libraries used in this product are subject to the  
GPL2.0/LGPL2.1/MPL1.1 License Agreements:  
GPL EXECUTABLES:  
• Linux kernel 2.6, busybox, e2fsprogs, gdbserver, jfsutils, mtd-utils, procps, u-boot, udhcpc  
LGPL LIBRARIES:  
• directFB, glibc, gconv  
MPL LIBRARIES:  
• Nanox  
LG Electronics offers to provide source code to you on CD-ROM for a charge covering the cost of  
performing such distribution, such as the cost of media, shipping and handling upon e-mail request  
to LG Electronics at: [email protected]  
This offer is valid for a period of three (3) years from the date of the distribution of this product by  
LG Electronics.  
You can obtain a copy of the GPL, LGPL and MPL licenses on the CD-ROM provided with this prod-  
uct. Also you can obtain the translation of GPL, LGPL licenses from http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-  
licenses/gpl-2.0-translations.html, http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1-translations.html.  
This product includes other open source software  
• expat:  
copyright © 1998, 1999, 2000 Thai Open Source Software Center Ltd and Clark Cooper  
copyright © 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006 Expat maintainers.  
• freetype: copyright © 2003 The FreeType Project (www.freetype.org).  
• ICU: copyright © 1995-2008 International Business Machines Corporation and others.  
• libcurl: copyright © 1996 - 2008, Daniel Stenberg.  
• libjpeg: This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group copyright ©  
1991 – 1998, Thomas G. Lane.  
• libmng: copyright © 2000-2007 Gerard Juyn, Glenn Randers-Pehrson  
• libpng: copyright © 1998-2008 Glenn Randers-Pehrson  
• md5: copyright © 1991-2, RSA Data Security, Inc  
• md5 checksum : copyright © 1999, 2000, 2002 Aladdin Enterprises  
• ncurses: copyright © 1998 Free Software Foundation, Inc.  
• openSSL:  
cryptographic software written by Eric Young.  
software written by Tim Hudson.  
software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit. (http://www.  
openssl.org)  
• strace :  
copyright © 1991, 1992 Paul Kranenburg.  
copyright © 1993 Branko Lankester.  
copyright © 1993 Ulrich Pegelow.  
copyright © 1995, 1996 Michael Elizabeth Chastain.  
156  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
copyright © 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996 Rick Sladkey.  
copyright © 1998-2003 Wichert Akkerman.  
copyright © 2002-2008 Roland McGrath.  
copyright © 2003-2008 Dmitry V. Levin.  
copyright © 2007-2008 Jan Kratochvil.  
• tinyxml: copyright © 2000-2006 Lee Thomason  
• xyssl: Copyright (C) 2009 Paul Bakker  
• zlib: copyright © 1995-2005 Jean-loup Gailly and Mark Adler  
All rights reserved.  
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and  
associated documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, includ-  
ing without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or  
sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, sub-  
ject to the following conditions:  
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR  
IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,  
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL  
THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR  
OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE,  
ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR  
OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.  
157  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
APPENDIX  
OPEN SOURCE LICENSE  
GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE  
Version 2, June 1991  
Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA  
Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.  
Preamble  
The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change it. By contrast, the GNU  
General Public License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free  
software--to make sure the software is free for all its users. This General Public License applies to most of the Free  
Software Foundation's software and to any other program whose authors commit to  
using it. (Some other Free Software Foundation software is covered by the GNU Lesser General Public License  
instead.) You can apply it to your programs, too.  
When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not price. Our General Public Licenses are designed to  
make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for  
this service if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it if you want it, that you can change the software or  
use pieces of it in new free programs; and that you know you can do these things.  
To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid anyone to deny you these rights or to ask you to sur-  
render the rights. These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of the software,  
or if you modify it.  
For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether gratis or for a fee, you must give the recipients all  
the rights that you have. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the source code. And you must show  
them these terms so they know their rights.  
We protect your rights with two steps: (1) copyright the software, and (2) offer you this license which gives you legal  
permission to copy, distribute and/or modify the software.  
Also, for each author's protection and ours, we want to make certain that everyone understands that there is no war-  
ranty for this free software. If the software is modified by someone else and passed on, we  
want its recipients to know that what they have is not the original, so that any problems introduced by others will not  
reflect on the original authors' reputations.  
Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by software patents. We wish to avoid the danger that redistributors  
of a free program will individually obtain patent licenses, in effect making the program proprietary. To prevent this, we  
have made it clear that any patent must be licensed for everyone's free use or not licensed at all.  
The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification follow.  
GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE  
TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION  
0. This License applies to any program or other work which contains a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it  
may be distributed under the terms of this General Public License. The "Program", below, refers to any such program  
or work, and a "work based on the Program" means either the Program or any derivative work under copyright law: that  
is to say, a work containing the Program or a portion of it, either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated into  
another language. (Hereinafter, translation is included without limitation in the term "modification".) Each licensee is  
addressed as "you".  
Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not covered by this License; they are outside its scope.  
The act of running the Program is not restricted, and the output from the Program  
is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the Program (independent of having been made by running  
the Program). Whether that is true depends on what the Program does.  
158  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program's source code as you receive it, in any medium, pro-  
vided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate  
copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the notices that refer to this License and to the absence of  
any warranty; and give any other recipients of the Program a copy of this License  
along with the Program.  
You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and you may at your option offer warranty protection in  
exchange for a fee.  
2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any portion of it, thus forming a work based on the Program,  
and copy and distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 above, provided that you also meet all  
of these conditions:  
a) You must cause the modified files to carry prominent notices stating that you changed the files and the date of any  
change.  
b) You must cause any work that you distribute or publish, that in whole or in part contains or is derived from the  
Program or any part thereof, to be licensed as a whole at no charge to all third parties under the terms of this  
License.  
c) If the modified program normally reads commands interactively when run, you must cause it, when started running  
for such interactive use in the most ordinary way, to print or display an announcement including an appropriate copy-  
right notice and a notice that there is no warranty (or else, saying that you provide a warranty) and that users may  
redistribute the program under these conditions, and telling the user how to view a copy of this License. (Exception:  
if the Program itself is interactive but does not normally print such an announcement, your work based on the  
Program is not required to print an announcement.)  
These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the  
Program, and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in themselves, then this License, and its  
terms, do not apply to those sections when you distribute them as separate works. But when you distribute the same  
sections as part of a whole which is a work based on the Program, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of  
this License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole, and thus to each and every part regard-  
less of who wrote it.  
Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work written entirely by you; rather, the  
intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or collective works based on the Program.  
In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Program with the Program (or with a work based on  
the Program) on a volume of a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under the scope of this  
License.  
3. You may copy and distribute the Program (or a work based on it, under Section 2) in object code or executable  
form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you also do one of the following:  
a) Accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable source code, which must be distributed under  
the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange; or,  
b) Accompany it with a written offer, valid for at least three years, to give any third party, for a charge no more than  
your cost of physically performing source distribution, a complete machine-readable copy of the corresponding  
source code, to be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software  
interchange; or,  
c) Accompany it with the information you received as to the offer to distribute corresponding source code. (This  
alternative is allowed only for noncommercial distribution and only if you received the program in object code or exe-  
cutable form with such an offer, in accord with Subsection b above.)  
The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it. For an executable  
work, complete source code means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any associated interface defini-  
tion files, plus the scripts used to control compilation and installation of the executable. However, as a special excep-  
tion, the source code distributed need not include anything that is normally distributed (in either source or binary  
form) with the major components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the operating system on which the executable runs,  
unless that component itself accompanies the executable.  
159  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
APPENDIX  
If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering access to copy from a designated place, then offering  
equivalent access to copy the source code from the same place counts as distribution of the source code, even though  
third parties are not compelled to copy the source along with the object code.  
4. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Program except as expressly provided under this License.  
Any attempt otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the Program is void, and will automatically terminate  
your rights under this License. However, parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under this License will  
not have their licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance.  
5. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not signed it. However, nothing else grants you permis-  
sion to modify or distribute the Program or its derivative works. These actions are prohibited by law if you do not  
accept this License. Therefore, by modifying or distributing the Program (or any work based on the Program), you indi-  
cate your acceptance of this License to do so, and all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying the  
Program or works based on it.  
6. Each time you redistribute the Program (or any work based on the Program), the recipient automatically receives a  
license from the original licensor to copy, distribute or modify the Program subject to these terms and conditions. You  
may not impose any further restrictions on the recipients' exercise of the rights granted herein. You are not responsible  
for enforcing compliance by third parties to this License.  
7. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for any other reason (not limited to  
patent issues), conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or otherwise) that contradict the con-  
ditions of this License, they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot distribute so as to sat-  
isfy simultaneously your obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you  
may not distribute the Program at all. For example, if a patent license would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the  
Program by all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you, then the only way you could satisfy both it  
and this License would be to refrain entirely from distribution of the Program.  
If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular circumstance, the balance of the sec-  
tion is intended to apply and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other circumstances.  
It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other property right claims or to contest  
validity of any such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the free software distribution  
system, which is implemented by public license practices. Many people have made generous contributions to the wide  
range of software distributed through that system in reliance on consistent application of that system; it is up to the  
author/donor to decide if he or she is willing to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot  
impose that choice.  
This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence of the rest of this License.  
8. If the distribution and/or use of the Program is restricted in certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted  
interfaces, the original copyright holder who places the Program under this License may add an explicit geographical  
distribution limitation excluding those countries, so that distribution is permitted only in or among countries not thus  
excluded. In such case, this License incorporates the limitation as if written in the body of this License.  
9. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of the General Public License from time to  
time. Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to address new problems  
or concerns.  
Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Program specifies a version number of this License which  
applies to it and "any later version", you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that version or of  
any later version published by the Free Software Foundation. If the Program does not specify a version number of  
this License, you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software Foundation.  
10. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free programs whose distribution conditions are different,  
write to the author to ask for permission. For software which is copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation, write to  
the Free Software Foundation; we sometimes make exceptions for this. Our decision will be guided by the two goals  
of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and of promoting the sharing and reuse of software  
generally.  
160  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
NO WARRANTY  
11. BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE  
PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN  
WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE PROGRAM "AS IS" WITHOUT  
WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED  
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO  
THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE  
DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION.  
12. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY  
COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE PROGRAM AS  
PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR  
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING  
BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY  
YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER PROGRAMS),  
EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.  
END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS  
How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs  
If you develop a new program, and you want it to be of the greatest possible use to the public, the best way to achieve  
this is to make it free software which everyone can redistribute and change under these terms.  
To do so, attach the following notices to the program. It is safest to attach them to the start of each source file to most  
effectively convey the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least the "copyright" line and a pointer to  
where the full notice is found.  
<one line to give the program's name and a brief idea of what it does.>  
Copyright (C) <year> <name of author>  
This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public  
License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or (at your option) any later  
version.  
This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the  
implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General  
Public License for more details.  
You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with this program; if not, write to the  
Free Software Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA.  
Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail.  
If the program is interactive, make it output a short notice like this when it starts in an interactive mode:  
Gnomovision version 69, Copyright (C) year name of author Gnomovision comes with ABSOLUTELY NO  
WARRANTY; for details type `show w'. This is free software, and you are welcome to redistribute it under certain  
conditions; type `show c' for details.  
The hypothetical commands `show w' and `show c' should show the appropriate parts of the General Public License.  
Of course, the commands you use may be called something other than `show w' and `show c'; they could even be  
mouse-clicks or menu items--whatever suits your program.  
You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or your school, if any, to sign a "copyright disclaimer"  
for the program, if necessary. Here is a sample; alter the names:  
Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the program `Gnomovision' (which makes passes at compil-  
ers) written by James Hacker.  
<signature of Ty Coon>, 1 April 1989  
Ty Coon, President of Vice  
This General Public License does not permit incorporating your program into proprietary programs. If your program is a  
subroutine library, you may consider it more useful to permit linking proprietary applications with the library. If this is  
what you want to do, use the GNU Lesser General Public License instead of this License.  
161  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
APPENDIX  
GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE  
Version 2.1, February 1999  
Copyright (C) 1991, 1999 Free Software Foundation, Inc. 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301  
USA Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document, but changing it is not  
allowed.  
[This is the first released version of the Lesser GPL. It also counts as the successor of the GNU Library Public  
License, version 2, hence the version number 2.1.]  
Preamble  
The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change it. By contrast, the GNU  
General Public Licenses are intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free software--to make sure the  
software is free for all its users.  
This license, the Lesser General Public License, applies to some specially designated software packages--typically  
libraries--of the Free Software Foundation and other authors who decide to use it. You can use it too, but we suggest  
you first think carefully about whether this license or the ordinary General Public License is the better strategy to use in  
any particular case, based on the explanations below.  
When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom of use, not price. Our General Public Licenses are  
designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for this service if you  
wish); that you receive source code or can get it if you want it; that you can change the software and use pieces of  
it in new free programs; and that you are informed that you can do these things.  
To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid distributors to deny you these rights or to ask you to  
surrender these rights. These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of the  
library or if you modify it.  
For example, if you distribute copies of the library, whether gratis or for a fee, you must give the recipients all the  
rights that we gave you. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the source code. If you link other code  
with the library, you must provide complete object files to the recipients, so that they can relink them with the library  
after making changes to the library and recompiling it. And you must show them these terms so they know their rights.  
We protect your rights with a two-step method: (1) we copyright the library, and (2) we offer you this license, which  
gives you legal permission to copy, distribute and/or modify the library.  
To protect each distributor, we want to make it very clear that there is no warranty for the free library. Also, if the  
library is modified by someone else and passed on, the recipients should know that what they have is not the original  
version, so that the original author's reputation will not be affected by problems that might be introduced by others.  
Finally, software patents pose a constant threat to the existence of any free program. We wish to make sure that a  
company cannot effectively restrict the users of a free program by obtaining a restrictive license from a patent holder.  
Therefore, we insist that any patent license obtained for a version of the library must be consistent with the full freedom  
of use specified in this license.  
Most GNU software, including some libraries, is covered by the ordinary GNU General Public License. This license,  
the GNU Lesser General Public License, applies to certain designated libraries, and is quite different from the ordinary  
General Public License. We use this license for certain libraries in order to permit linking those libraries into non-free  
programs.  
When a program is linked with a library, whether statically or using a shared library, the combination of the two is  
legally speaking a combined work, a derivative of the original library. The ordinary General Public License therefore  
permits such linking only if the entire combination fits its criteria of freedom. The Lesser General Public License permits  
more lax criteria for linking other code with the library.  
We call this license the "Lesser" General Public License because it does Less to protect the user's freedom than the  
ordinary General Public License. It also provides other free software developers Less of an advantage over competing  
non-free programs. These disadvantages are the reason we use the ordinary General Public License for many  
libraries. However, the Lesser license provides advantages in certain special circumstances.  
For example, on rare occasions, there may be a special need to encourage the widest possible use of a certain library,  
so that it becomes a de-facto standard. To achieve this, non-free programs must be allowed to use the library. A more  
frequent case is that a free library does the same job as widely used non-free libraries. In this case, there is little to  
gain by limiting the free library to free software only, so we use the Lesser General Public License.  
In other cases, permission to use a particular library in non-free programs enables a greater number of people to use  
a large body of free software. For example, permission to use the GNU C Library in non-free programs enables many  
more people to use the whole GNU operating system, as well as its variant, the GNU/Linux operating system.  
162  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Although the Lesser General Public License is Less protective of the users' freedom, it does ensure that the user of a  
program that is linked with the Library has the freedom and the wherewithal to run that program using a modified ver-  
sion of the Library.  
The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification follow. Pay close attention to the differ-  
ence between a "work based on the library" and a "work that uses the library". The former contains code derived from  
the library, whereas the latter must be combined with the library in order to run.  
GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE  
TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION  
0. This License Agreement applies to any software library or other program which contains a notice placed by the  
copyright holder or other authorized party saying it may be distributed under the terms of this Lesser General Public  
License (also called "this License"). Each licensee is addressed as "you".  
A "library" means a collection of software functions and/or data prepared so as to be conveniently linked with applica-  
tion programs (which use some of those functions and data) to form executables.  
The "Library", below, refers to any such software library or work which has been distributed under these terms. A  
"work based on the Library" means either the Library or any derivative work under copyright law: that is to say, a work  
containing the Library or a portion of it, either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated straightforwardly into  
another language. (Hereinafter, translation is included without limitation in the term "modification".)  
"Source code" for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it. For a library, complete  
source code means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any associated interface definition files, plus  
the scripts used to control compilation and installation of the library.  
Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not covered by this License; they are outside its scope.  
The act of running a program using the Library is not restricted, and output from such a program is covered only if its  
contents constitute a work based on the Library (independent of the use of the Library in a tool for writing it). Whether  
that is true depends on what the Library does and what the program that uses the Library does.  
1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Library's complete source code as you receive it, in any medi-  
um, provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice and dis-  
claimer of warranty; keep intact all the notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty; and distrib-  
ute a copy of this License along with the Library.  
You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and you may at your option offer warranty protection  
in exchange for a fee.  
2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Library or any portion of it, thus forming a work based on the Library,  
and copy and distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 above, provided that you also meet all  
of these conditions:  
a) The modified work must itself be a software library.  
b) You must cause the files modified to carry prominent notices stating that you changed the files and the date of  
any change.  
c) You must cause the whole of the work to be licensed at no charge to all third parties under the terms of this  
License.  
d) If a facility in the modified Library refers to a function or a table of data to be supplied by an application program  
that uses the facility, other than as an argument passed when the facility is invoked, then you must make a good  
faith effort to ensure that, in the event an application does not supply such function or table, the facility still operates,  
and performs whatever part of its purpose remains meaningful.  
(For example, a function in a library to compute square roots has a purpose that is entirely well-defined independent of  
the application. Therefore, Subsection 2d requires that any application-supplied function or table used by this function  
must be optional: if the application does not supply it, the square root function must still compute square roots.)  
These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the  
Library, and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in themselves, then this License, and its  
terms, do not apply to those sections when you distribute them as separate works. But when you distribute the same  
sections as part of a whole which is a work based on the Library, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of  
this License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole, and thus to each and every part regard-  
less of who wrote it.  
163  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
APPENDIX  
Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work written entirely by you; rather, the  
intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or collective works based on the Library.  
In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Library with the Library (or with a work based on the  
Library) on a volume of a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under the scope of this License.  
3. You may opt to apply the terms of the ordinary GNU General Public License instead of this License to a given copy  
of the Library. To do this, you must alter all the notices that refer to this License, so that they refer to the ordinary GNU  
General Public License, version 2, instead of to this License. (If a newer version than version 2 of the ordinary GNU  
General Public License has appeared, then you can specify that version instead if you wish.) Do not make any other  
change in these notices.  
Once this change is made in a given copy, it is irreversible for that copy, so the ordinary GNU General Public License  
applies to all subsequent copies and derivative works made from that copy.  
This option is useful when you wish to copy part of the code of the Library into a program that is not a library.  
4. You may copy and distribute the Library (or a portion or derivative of it, under Section 2) in object code or execut-  
able form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you accompany it with the complete corresponding  
machine-readable source code, which must be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a  
medium customarily used for software interchange.  
If distribution of object code is made by offering access to copy from a designated place, then offering equivalent  
access to copy the source code from the same place satisfies the requirement to distribute the source code, even  
though third parties are not compelled to copy the source along with the object code.  
5. A program that contains no derivative of any portion of the Library, but is designed to work with the Library by being  
compiled or linked with it, is called a "work that uses the Library". Such a work, in isolation, is not a derivative work of  
the Library, and therefore falls outside the scope of this License.  
However, linking a "work that uses the Library" with the Library creates an executable that is a derivative of the Library  
(because it contains portions of the Library), rather than a "work that uses the library". The executable is therefore cov-  
ered by this License. Section 6 states terms for distribution of such executables.  
When a "work that uses the Library" uses material from a header file that is part of the Library, the object code for the  
work may be a derivative work of the Library even though the source code is not.  
Whether this is true is especially significant if the work can be linked without the Library, or if the work is itself a library.  
The threshold for this to be true is not precisely defined by law.  
If such an object file uses only numerical parameters, data structure layouts and accessors, and small macros and  
small inline functions (ten lines or less in length), then the use of the object file is unrestricted, regardless of whether it  
is legally a derivative work. (Executables containing this object code plus portions of the Library will still fall under  
Section 6.)  
Otherwise, if the work is a derivative of the Library, you may distribute the object code for the work under the terms of  
Section 6. Any executables containing that work also fall under Section 6, whether or not they are linked directly with  
the Library itself.  
6. As an exception to the Sections above, you may also combine or link a "work that uses the Library" with the Library  
to produce a work containing portions of the Library, and distribute that work under terms of your choice, provided that  
the terms permit modification of the work for the customer's own use and reverse engineering for debugging such modi-  
fications.  
You must give prominent notice with each copy of the work that the Library is used in it and that the Library and its  
use are covered by this License. You must supply a copy of this License. If the work during execution displays copy-  
right notices, you must include the copyright notice for the Library among them, as well as a reference directing the  
user to the copy of this License. Also, you must do one of these things:  
a) Accompany the work with the complete corresponding machine-readable source code for the Library including  
whatever changes were used in the work (which must be distributed under Sections 1 and 2 above); and, if the work  
is an executable linked with the Library, with the complete machine-readable "work that uses the Library", as object  
code and/or source code, so that the user can modify the Library and then relink to produce a modified executable  
containing the modified Library. (It is understood that the user who changes the contents of definitions files in the  
Library will not necessarily be able to recompile the application to use the modified definitions.)  
b) Use a suitable shared library mechanism for linking with the Library. A suitable mechanism is one that (1) uses at  
run time a copy of the library already present on the user's computer system, rather than copying library functions  
into the executable, and (2) will operate properly with a modified version of the library, if the user installs one, as  
long as the modified version is interface-compatible with the version that the work was made with.  
164  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
c) Accompany the work with a written offer, valid for at least three years, to give the same user the materials  
specified in Subsection 6a, above, for a charge no more than the cost of performing this distribution.  
d) If distribution of the work is made by offering access to copy from a designated place, offer equivalent access to  
copy the above specified materials from the same place.  
e) Verify that the user has already received a copy of these materials or that you have already sent this user a copy.  
For an executable, the required form of the "work that uses the Library" must include any data and utility programs  
needed for reproducing the executable from it. However, as a special exception, the materials to be distributed need  
not include anything that is normally distributed (in either source or binary form) with the major components (compiler,  
kernel, and so on) of the operating system on which the executable runs, unless that component itself accompanies  
the executable.  
It may happen that this requirement contradicts the license restrictions of other proprietary libraries that do not normal-  
ly accompany the operating system. Such a contradiction means you cannot use both them and the Library together in  
an executable that you distribute.  
7. You may place library facilities that are a work based on the Library side-by-side in a single library together with  
other library facilities not covered by this License, and distribute such a combined library, provided that the separate  
distribution of the work based on the Library and of the other library facilities is otherwise permitted, and provided that  
you do these two things:  
a) Accompany the combined library with a copy of the same work based on the Library, uncombined with any other  
library facilities. This must be distributed under the terms of the Sections above.  
b) Give prominent notice with the combined library of the fact that part of it is a work based on the Library, and  
explaining where to find the accompanying uncombined form of the same work.  
8. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, link with, or distribute the Library except as expressly provided under this  
License. Any attempt otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense, link with, or distribute the Library is void, and will automati-  
cally terminate your rights under this License. However, parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under  
this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance.  
9. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not signed it. However, nothing else grants you permis-  
sion to modify or distribute the Library or its derivative works. These actions are prohibited by law if you do not accept  
this License. Therefore, by modifying or distributing the Library (or any work based on the Library), you indicate your  
acceptance of this License to do so, and all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying the Library or  
works based on it.  
10. Each time you redistribute the Library (or any work based on the Library), the recipient automatically receives a  
license from the original licensor to copy, distribute, link with or modify the Library subject to these terms and condi-  
tions. You may not impose any further restrictions on the recipients' exercise of the rights granted herein.  
You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties with this License.  
11. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for any other reason (not limited to  
patent issues), conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or otherwise) that contradict the con-  
ditions of this License, they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot distribute so as to sat-  
isfy simultaneously your obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you  
may not distribute the Library at all. For example, if a patent license would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the  
Library by all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you, then the only way you could satisfy both it and  
this License would be to refrain entirely from distribution of the Library.  
If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular circumstance, the balance of the sec-  
tion is intended to apply, and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other circumstances.  
It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other property right claims or to contest  
validity of any such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the free software distribution  
system which is implemented by public license practices. Many people have made generous contributions to the wide  
range of software distributed through that system in reliance on consistent application of that system; it is up to the  
author/donor to decide if he or she is willing to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot  
impose that choice.  
This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence of the rest of this License.  
12. If the distribution and/or use of the Library is restricted in certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted  
interfaces, the original copyright holder who places the Library under this License may add an explicit geographical dis-  
tribution limitation excluding those countries, so that distribution is permitted only in or among countries not thus  
excluded. In such case, this License incorporates the limitation as if written in the body of this License.  
165  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
APPENDIX  
13. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of the Lesser General Public License from  
time to time. Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to address new prob-  
lems or concerns.  
Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Library specifies a version number of this License which  
applies to it and "any later version", you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that version or of  
any later version published by the Free Software Foundation. If the Library does not specify a license version number,  
you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software Foundation.  
14. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Library into other free programs whose distribution conditions are incompatible  
with these, write to the author to ask for permission. For software which is copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation,  
write to the Free Software Foundation; we sometimes make exceptions for this. Our decision will be guided by the two  
goals of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and of promoting the sharing  
and reuse of software generally.  
NO WARRANTY  
15. BECAUSE THE LIBRARY IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE LIBRARY, TO  
THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE  
COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE LIBRARY "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY  
KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF  
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND  
PERFORMANCE OF THE LIBRARY IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE LIBRARY PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE  
COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION.  
16. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT  
HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE LIBRARY AS PERMITTED  
ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR  
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE LIBRARY (INCLUDING BUT  
NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR  
THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE LIBRARY TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER SOFTWARE), EVEN IF  
SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.  
END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS  
How to Apply These Terms to Your New Libraries  
If you develop a new library, and you want it to be of the greatest possible use to the public, we recommend making it  
free software that everyone can redistribute and change. You can do so by permitting redistribution under these terms (or,  
alternatively, under the terms of the ordinary General Public License).  
To apply these terms, attach the following notices to the library. It is safest to attach them to the start of each source file  
to most effectively convey the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least the "copyright" line and a pointer  
to where the full notice is found.  
<one line to give the library's name and a brief idea of what it does.>  
Copyright (C) <year> <name of author>  
This library is free software; you can redistribute it and/or  
modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General  
Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any  
later version.  
This library is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied  
warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU Lesser General Public  
License for more details.  
You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public License along with this library; if not, write to the  
Free Software Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA  
Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail.  
You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or your school, if any, to sign a "copyright disclaimer"  
for the library, if necessary. Here is a sample; alter the names:  
Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the library `Frob' (a library for tweaking knobs) written by  
James Random Hacker.  
<signature of Ty Coon>, 1 April 1990  
Ty Coon, President of Vice  
166  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MOZILLA PUBLIC LICENSE  
Version 1.1  
---------------  
1. Definitions.  
1.0.1. "Commercial Use" means distribution or otherwise making the Covered Code available to a third party.  
1.1. "Contributor" means each entity that creates or contributes to the creation of Modifications.  
1.2. "Contributor Version" means the combination of the Original Code, prior Modifications used by a Contributor,  
and the Modifications made by that particular Contributor.  
1.3. "Covered Code" means the Original Code or Modifications or the combination of the Original Code and  
Modifications, in each case including portions thereof.  
1.4. "Electronic Distribution Mechanism" means a mechanism generally accepted in the software development com-  
munity for the electronic transfer of data.  
1.5. "Executable" means Covered Code in any form other than Source Code.  
1.6. "Initial Developer" means the individual or entity identified as the Initial Developer in the Source Code notice  
required by Exhibit A.  
1.7. "Larger Work" means a work which combines Covered Code or portions thereof with code not governed by the  
terms of this License.  
1.8. "License" means this document.  
1.8.1. "Licensable" means having the right to grant, to the maximum extent possible, whether at the time of the ini-  
tial grant or subsequently acquired, any and all of the rights conveyed herein.  
1.9. "Modifications" means any addition to or deletion from the substance or structure of either the Original Code or  
any previous Modifications. When Covered Code is released as a series of files, a Modification is:  
A. Any addition to or deletion from the contents of a file containing Original Code or previous Modifications.  
B. Any new file that contains any part of the Original Code or previous Modifications.  
1.10. "Original Code" means Source Code of computer software code which is described in the Source Code notice  
required by Exhibit A as Original Code, and which, at the time of its release under this License is not already  
Covered Code governed by this License.  
1.10.1. "Patent Claims" means any patent claim(s), now owned or hereafter acquired, including without limitation,  
method, process, and apparatus claims, in any patent Licensable by grantor.  
1.11. "Source Code" means the preferred form of the Covered Code for making modifications to it, including all  
modules it contains, plus any associated interface definition files, scripts used to control compilation and installation  
of an Executable, or source code differential comparisons against either the Original Code or another well known,  
available Covered Code of the Contributor's choice. The Source Code can be in a compressed or archival form,  
provided the appropriate decompression or de-archiving software is widely available for no charge.  
1.12. "You" (or "Your") means an individual or a legal entity exercising rights under, and complying with all of the  
terms of, this License or a future version of this License issued under Section 6.1.  
For legal entities, "You" includes any entity which controls, is controlled by, or is under common control with You.  
For purposes of this definition, "control" means (a) the power, direct or indirect, to cause the direction or manage-  
ment of such entity, whether by contract or otherwise, or (b) ownership of more than fifty percent (50%) of the out-  
standing shares or beneficial ownership of such entity.  
2. Source Code License.  
2.1. The Initial Developer Grant.  
The Initial Developer hereby grants You a world-wide, royalty-free, non-exclusive license, subject to third party intel-  
lectual property claims:  
(a) under intellectual property rights (other than patent or trademark) Licensable by Initial Developer to use,  
reproduce, modify, display, perform, sublicense and distribute the Original Code (or portions thereof) with or  
without Modifications, and/or as part of a Larger Work; and  
167  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
APPENDIX  
(b) under Patents Claims infringed by the making, using or selling of Original Code, to make, have made, use,  
practice, sell, and offer for sale, and/or otherwise dispose of the Original Code (or portions thereof).  
(c) the licenses granted in this Section 2.1(a) and (b) are effective on the date Initial Developer first distributes  
Original Code under the terms of this License.  
(d) Notwithstanding Section 2.1(b) above, no patent license is granted: 1) for code that You delete from the  
Original Code; 2) separate from the Original Code; or 3) for infringements caused by: i) the modification of the  
Original Code or ii) the combination of the Original Code with other software or devices.  
2.2. Contributor Grant.  
Subject to third party intellectual property claims, each Contributor hereby grants You a world-wide, royalty-free,  
non-exclusive license  
(a) under intellectual property rights (other than patent or trademark) Licensable by Contributor, to use, repro-  
duce, modify, display, perform, sublicense and distribute the Modifications created by such Contributor (or por-  
tions thereof) either on an unmodified basis, with other Modifications, as Covered Code and/or as part of a  
Larger Work; and  
(b) under Patent Claims infringed by the making, using, or selling of Modifications made by that Contributor  
either alone and/or in combination with its Contributor Version (or portions of such combination), to make, use,  
sell, offer for sale, have made, and/or otherwise dispose of: 1) Modifications made by that Contributor (or portions  
thereof); and 2) the combination of Modifications made by that Contributor with its Contributor Version (or por-  
tions of such combination).  
(c) the licenses granted in Sections 2.2(a) and 2.2(b) are effective on the date Contributor first makes  
Commercial Use of the Covered Code.  
(d) Notwithstanding Section 2.2(b) above, no patent license is granted: 1) for any code that Contributor has delet-  
ed from the Contributor Version; 2) separate from the Contributor Version; 3) for infringements caused by: i)  
third party modifications of Contributor Version or ii) the combination of Modifications made by that Contributor  
with other software (except as part of the Contributor Version) or other devices; or 4) under Patent Claims  
infringed by Covered Code in the absence of Modifications made by that Contributor.  
3. Distribution Obligations.  
3.1. Application of License.  
The Modifications which You create or to which You contribute are governed by the terms of this License, including  
without limitation Section 2.2. The Source Code version of Covered Code may be distributed only under the terms of  
this License or a future version of this License released under Section 6.1, and You must include a copy of this  
License with every copy of the Source Code You distribute. You may not offer or impose any terms on any Source  
Code version that alters or restricts the applicable version of this License or the recipients' rights hereunder.  
However, You may include an additional document offering the additional rights described in Section 3.5.  
3.2. Availability of Source Code.  
Any Modification which You create or to which You contribute must be made available in Source Code form under  
the terms of this License either on the same media as an Executable version or via an accepted Electronic  
Distribution Mechanism to anyone to whom you made an Executable version available; and if made available via  
Electronic Distribution Mechanism, must remain available for at least twelve (12) months after the date it initially  
became available, or at least six (6) months after a subsequent version of that particular Modification has been  
made available to such recipients. You are responsible for ensuring that the Source Code version remains available  
even if the  
Electronic Distribution Mechanism is maintained by a third party.  
3.3. Description of Modifications.  
You must cause all Covered Code to which You contribute to contain a file documenting the changes You made to  
create that Covered Code and the date of any change. You must include a prominent statement that the Modification  
is derived, directly or indirectly, from Original Code provided by the Initial Developer and including the name of the  
Initial Developer in (a) the Source Code, and (b) in any notice in an Executable version or related documentation in  
which You describe the origin or ownership of the Covered Code.  
3.4. Intellectual Property Matters  
(a) Third Party Claims.  
If Contributor has knowledge that a license under a third party's intellectual property rights is required to exercise  
the rights granted by such Contributor under Sections 2.1 or 2.2, Contributor must include a text file with the  
Source Code distribution titled "LEGAL" which describes the claim and the party making the claim in sufficient  
detail that a recipient will know whom to contact. If Contributor obtains such knowledge after the Modification is  
made available as described in Section 3.2, Contributor shall promptly modify the LEGAL file in all copies  
Contributor makes available thereafter and shall take other steps (such as notifying appropriate mailing lists or  
newsgroups) reasonably calculated to inform those who received the Covered Code that new knowledge has  
been obtained.  
168  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(b) Contributor APIs.  
If Contributor's Modifications include an application programming interface and Contributor has knowledge of  
patent licenses which are reasonably necessary to implement that API, Contributor must also include this infor-  
mation in the LEGAL file.  
(c) Representations.  
Contributor represents that, except as disclosed pursuant to Section 3.4(a) above, Contributor believes that  
Contributor's Modifications are Contributor's original creation(s) and/or Contributor has sufficient rights to grant  
the rights conveyed by this License.  
3.5. Required Notices.  
You must duplicate the notice in Exhibit A in each file of the Source Code. If it is not possible to put such notice in a  
particular Source Code file due to its structure, then You must include such notice in a location (such as a relevant  
directory) where a user would be likely to look for such a notice. If You created one or more Modification(s)  
You may add your name as a Contributor to the notice described in Exhibit A. You must also duplicate this License  
in any documentation for the Source Code where You describe recipients' rights or ownership rights relating to  
Covered Code. You may choose to offer, and to charge a fee for, warranty, support, indemnity or liability obligations  
to one or more recipients of Covered Code. However, You may do so only on Your own behalf, and not on behalf of  
the Initial  
Developer or any Contributor. You must make it absolutely clear than any such warranty, support, indemnity or liabil-  
ity obligation is offered by You alone, and You hereby agree to indemnify the Initial Developer and every Contributor  
for any liability incurred by the Initial Developer or such Contributor as a result of warranty, support, indemnity or lia-  
bility terms You offer.  
3.6. Distribution of Executable Versions.  
You may distribute Covered Code in Executable form only if the requirements of Section 3.1-3.5 have been met for  
that Covered Code, and if You include a notice stating that the Source Code version of the Covered Code is avail-  
able under the terms of this License, including a description of how and where You have fulfilled the obligations of  
Section 3.2. The notice must be conspicuously included in any notice in an Executable version, related documenta-  
tion or collateral in which You describe recipients' rights relating to the Covered Code. You may distribute the  
Executable version of Covered Code or ownership rights under a license of Your choice, which may contain terms  
different from this License, provided that You are in compliance with the terms of this License and that the license  
for the Executable version does not attempt to limit or alter the recipient's rights in the Source Code version from  
the rights set forth in this  
License. If You distribute the Executable version under a different license You must make it absolutely clear that any  
terms which differ from this License are offered by You alone, not by the Initial Developer or any Contributor. You  
hereby agree to indemnify the Initial Developer and every Contributor for any liability incurred by the Initial  
Developer or such Contributor as a result of any such terms You offer.  
3.7. Larger Works.  
You may create a Larger Work by combining Covered Code with other code not governed by the terms of this  
License and distribute the Larger Work as a single product. In such a case, You must make sure the requirements  
of this License are fulfilled for the Covered Code.  
4. Inability to Comply Due to Statute or Regulation.  
If it is impossible for You to comply with any of the terms of this License with respect to some or all of the Covered  
Code due to statute, judicial order, or regulation then You must: (a) comply with the terms of this License to the max-  
imum extent possible; and (b) describe the limitations and the code they affect. Such description must be included in  
the LEGAL file described in Section 3.4 and must be included with all distributions of the Source Code. Except to  
the  
extent prohibited by statute or regulation, such description must be sufficiently detailed for a recipient of ordinary  
skill to be able to understand it.  
5. Application of this License.  
This License applies to code to which the Initial Developer has attached the notice in Exhibit A and to related  
Covered Code.  
6. Versions of the License.  
6.1. New Versions.  
Netscape Communications Corporation ("Netscape") may publish revised and/or new versions of the License from  
time to time. Each version will be given a distinguishing version number.  
6.2. Effect of New Versions.  
Once Covered Code has been published under a particular version of the License, You may always continue to use  
it under the terms of that version. You may also choose to use such Covered Code under the terms of any subse-  
quent version of the License published by Netscape. No one other than Netscape has the right to modify the terms  
applicable to Covered Code created under this License.  
169  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
APPENDIX  
6.3. Derivative Works.  
If You create or use a modified version of this License (which you may only do in order to apply it to code which is  
not already Covered Code governed by this License), You must (a) rename Your license so that the phrases  
"Mozilla", "MOZILLAPL", "MOZPL", "Netscape", "MPL", "NPL" or any confusingly similar phrase do not appear in  
your license (except to note that your license differs from this License) and (b) otherwise make it clear that Your ver-  
sion of the license contains terms which differ from the Mozilla Public License and Netscape Public License. (Filling  
in the name of the Initial Developer, Original Code or Contributor in the notice described in Exhibit A shall not of  
themselves be deemed to be modifications of this License.)  
7. DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY.  
COVERED CODE IS PROVIDED UNDER THIS LICENSE ON AN "AS IS" BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY  
KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, WARRANTIES THAT THE  
COVERED CODE IS FREE OF DEFECTS, MERCHANTABLE, FIT FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR NON-  
INFRINGING. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE COVERED CODE IS WITH  
YOU. SHOULD ANY COVERED CODE PROVE DEFECTIVE IN ANY RESPECT, YOU (NOT THE INITIAL  
DEVELOPER OR ANY OTHER CONTRIBUTOR) ASSUME THE COST OF ANY NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR  
OR CORRECTION. THIS DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY CONSTITUTES AN ESSENTIAL PART OF THIS LICENSE.  
NO USE OF ANY COVERED CODE IS AUTHORIZED HEREUNDER EXCEPT UNDER THIS DISCLAIMER.  
8. TERMINATION.  
8.1. This License and the rights granted hereunder will terminate automatically if You fail to comply with terms here-  
in and fail to cure such breach within 30 days of becoming aware of the breach. All sublicenses to the Covered  
Code which are properly granted shall survive any termination of this License. Provisions which, by their nature,  
must remain in effect beyond the termination of this License shall survive.  
8.2. If You initiate litigation by asserting a patent infringement claim (excluding declatory judgment actions) against  
Initial Developer or a Contributor (the Initial Developer or Contributor against whom You file such action is referred  
to as "Participant") alleging that:  
(a) such Participant's Contributor Version directly or indirectly infringes any patent, then any and all rights granted  
by such Participant to You under Sections 2.1 and/or 2.2 of this License shall, upon 60 days notice from Participant  
terminate prospectively, unless if within 60 days after receipt of notice You either: (i) agree in writing to pay  
Participant a mutually agreeable reasonable royalty for Your past and future use of Modifications made by such  
Participant, or (ii) withdraw Your litigation claim with respect to the Contributor Version against such Participant. If  
within 60 days of notice, a reasonable royalty and payment arrangement are not mutually agreed upon in writing by  
the parties or the litigation claim is not withdrawn, the rights granted by Participant to You under Sections 2.1 and/or  
2.2 automatically terminate at the expiration of the 60 day notice period specified above.  
(b) any software, hardware, or device, other than such Participant's Contributor Version, directly or indirectly  
infringes any patent, then any rights granted to You by such Participant under Sections 2.1(b) and 2.2(b) are  
revoked effective as of the date You first made, used, sold, distributed, or had made, Modifications made by that  
Participant.  
8.3. If You assert a patent infringement claim against Participant alleging that such Participant's Contributor Version  
directly or indirectly infringes any patent where such claim is resolved (such as by license or settlement) prior to the  
initiation of patent infringement litigation, then the reasonable value of the licenses granted by such Participant  
under Sections 2.1 or 2.2 shall be taken into account in determining the amount or value of any payment or license.  
8.4. In the event of termination under Sections 8.1 or 8.2 above, all end user license agreements (excluding distrib-  
utors and resellers) which have been validly granted by You or any distributor hereunder prior to termination shall  
survive termination.  
9. LIMITATION OF LIABILITY.  
UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES AND UNDER NO LEGAL THEORY, WHETHER TORT (INCLUDING  
NEGLIGENCE), CONTRACT, OR OTHERWISE, SHALL YOU, THE INITIAL DEVELOPER, ANY OTHER  
CONTRIBUTOR, OR ANY DISTRIBUTOR OF COVERED CODE,OR ANY SUPPLIER OF ANY OF SUCH PARTIES,  
BE LIABLE TO ANY PERSON FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF  
ANY CHARACTER INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF GOODWILL, WORK  
STOPPAGE, COMPUTER FAILURE OR MALFUNCTION, OR ANY AND ALL OTHER COMMERCIAL DAMAGES OR  
LOSSES, EVEN IF SUCH PARTY SHALL HAVE BEEN INFORMED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.  
THIS LIMITATION OF LIABILITY SHALL NOT APPLY TO LIABILITY FOR DEATH OR PERSONAL INJURY  
RESULTING FROM SUCH PARTY'S NEGLIGENCE TO THE EXTENT APPLICABLE LAW PROHIBITS SUCH  
LIMITATION. SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR  
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THIS EXCLUSION AND LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.  
170  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10. U.S. GOVERNMENT END USERS.  
The Covered Code is a "commercial item," as that term is defined in 48 C.F.R. 2.101 (Oct. 1995), consisting of  
"commercial computer software" and "commercial computer software documentation," as such terms are used in 48  
C.F.R. 12.212 (Sept. 1995). Consistent with 48 C.F.R. 12.212 and 48 C.F.R. 227.7202-1 through 227.7202-4 (June  
1995), all U.S. Government End Users acquire Covered Code with only those rights set forth herein.  
11. MISCELLANEOUS.  
This License represents the complete agreement concerning subject matter hereof. If any provision of this License  
is held to be unenforceable, such provision shall be reformed only to the extent necessary to make it enforceable. This  
License shall be governed by California law provisions (except to the extent applicable law, if any, provides otherwise),  
excluding its conflict-of-law provisions. With respect to disputes in which at least one party is a citizen of, or an entity  
chartered or registered to do business in the United States of America, any litigation relating to this License shall be  
subject to the jurisdiction of the Federal Courts of the Northern District of California, with venue lying in Santa Clara  
County, California, with the losing party responsible for costs, including without limitation, court costs and reasonable  
attorneys' fees and expenses. The application of the United Nations Convention on Contracts for the International Sale  
of Goods is expressly excluded. Any law or regulation which provides that the language of a contract shall be construed  
against the drafter shall not apply to this License.  
12. RESPONSIBILITY FOR CLAIMS.  
As between Initial Developer and the Contributors, each party is responsible for claims and damages arising, direct-  
ly or indirectly, out of its utilization of rights under this License and You agree to work with Initial Developer and  
Contributors to distribute such responsibility on an equitable basis. Nothing herein is intended or shall be deemed to  
constitute any admission of liability.  
13. MULTIPLE-LICENSED CODE.  
Initial Developer may designate portions of the Covered Code as "Multiple-Licensed". "Multiple-Licensed" means  
that the Initial Developer permits you to utilize portions of the Covered Code under Your choice of the NPL or the alter-  
native licenses, if any, specified by the Initial Developer in the file described in Exhibit A.  
EXHIBIT A -Mozilla Public License.  
``The contents of this file are subject to the Mozilla Public License Version 1.1 (the "License"); you may not use this  
file except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of the License at http://www.mozilla.org/MPL/  
Software distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS IS" basis, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,  
either express or implied. See the License for the specific language governing rights and limitations under the License.  
The Original Code is ______________________________________.  
The Initial Developer of the Original Code is ________________________.  
Portions created by ______________________ are Copyright (C) ______  
_______________________. All Rights Reserved.  
Contributor(s): ______________________________________.  
Alternatively, the contents of this file may be used under the terms of the _____ license (the "[___] License"), in  
which case the provisions of [______] License are applicable instead of those above. If you wish to allow use of your  
version of this file only under the terms of the [____] License and not to allow others to use your version of this file  
under the MPL, indicate your decision by deleting the provisions above and replace them with the notice and other  
provisions required by the [___] License. If you do not delete the provisions above, a recipient may use your version of  
this file under either the MPL or the [___] License."  
[NOTE: The text of this Exhibit A may differ slightly from the text of the notices in the Source Code files of the  
Original Code. You should use the text of this Exhibit A rather than the text found in the Original Code Source Code for  
Your Modifications.]  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Record the model number and serial number of  
the TV.  
Refer to the label on the back cover and quote  
this information to your dealer when requiring  
any service.  
Model :  
Trade Mark of the DVB Digital Video  
Broadcasting Project (1991 to 1996)  
Serial No. :  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Kyocera Photo Scanner TASKalfa3050ci User Manual
Lasko Fan 3723 User Manual
Lenoxx Electronics CD Player CD 104 User Manual
Life Fitness Elliptical Trainer 95X 0XXX 01 User Manual
Lincoln Electric Welder 11079 User Manual
Makita Cordless Drill 6203DWAE User Manual
Martin Audio Portable Speaker Screen 2P User Manual
M Audio Electronic Keyboard K6 User Manual
MaxTech Computer Monitor XT4862 User Manual
Maxtor Computer Drive 4A160J0 User Manual